JP4836858B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and is particularly advantageous for a player such as a big bonus. The present invention relates to a slot machine having a special gaming state.

  Conventionally, for example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a special winning (for example, a combination of “7-7-7”, hereinafter also referred to as a special role) is arranged on a winning line on a variable display device composed of a plurality of reels, a big bonus, etc. A slot machine that shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player of the player is generally used.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles with payout of medals, replay roles that allow the next game to be started without setting the number of bets, and transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player such as regular bonuses and big bonuses. There is a bonus role with. In particular, the bonus combination is not limited to the winning game, and a large profit can be obtained as a whole over a certain period after the winning. Therefore, the player is most interested in the occurrence of the winning combination.

  In addition, in order to increase the expectation for winning the transitional role described above, a display result (so-called chance) that can be expected to win the transitional role when a specific role to which a game value (medal etc.) is given in accordance with winning a prize is missed. By deriving the eye), there is one that increases the expectation of winning the transitional role (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, in this type of slot machine, a game called a big bonus game (small role game) is provided in which a combination of JACIN prizes is arranged with a high probability when shifting to a big bonus. With the transition to the regular bonus that can be expected to acquire more gaming value (game media such as medals and pachinko balls) than the normal gaming state, that is, with the control to the big bonus game In many cases, the special gaming state is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state by generating a regular bonus with a high probability (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2005-168851 A JP-A-6-327809

  However, as in the slot machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in the case of deriving the chance as described above when a specific combination to which a game value (medal or the like) is given is missed, for example, the specific combination If a highly skilled player who aims at the composition pattern of each game specific role plays a game so as not to miss the chance, the rate at which chance chances are derived will be extremely low, so this There was a problem that it was not possible to sufficiently raise the expectation for the transition role for a serious player.

  In addition, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, the types of small roles that are won in the small role game are basically the same as the normal gaming state, and even when the internal lottery is won and a prize is won. In some cases, a small role that only pays out a small number of medals compared to other types of small roles may be won. In this way, if you win a small role that only pays out a small number of medals, However, there is a problem that the profit that the player can receive becomes smaller than in the case of winning another type of small role where a large number of medals are paid out. In particular, when the number of games won is determined as an end condition, winning a small role with a small number of medals has been a big disadvantage for the player.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and can effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role, and the player can play a minimum number of games in the special game state. An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that prevents only the utility value from being acquired.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). A slot machine in which one game is finished by displaying a result and a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the first specific prize-winning (1 (1)) accompanied by the awarding of the gaming value and the first specific prize-winning (1 sheet) (1)) a plurality of types of prizes (small role) including the second specific prizes (1 (2) / 1 (3)) with the same number of gaming values as those for the game, Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a special prize (special role) with a transition to an advantageous special gaming state (big bonus, challenge bonus),
Determination that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is permitted by the pre-determining means, and the occurrence of the special prize is not permitted when the special prize (special role) is not generated ( Carry-over means to carry over the special role winning flag) after the next game,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas ;
A variable display corresponding to the operation of the derivation operating means by stopping the variable display of the symbol within a predetermined maximum stop delay time from the operation of the derivation operating means in accordance with the determination of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the area (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
Based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied, a game is played in a state that is more than the normal game state until a predetermined end condition that is satisfied when the total amount of gaming value reaches a predetermined amount is satisfied. Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state that is an advantageous gaming state for a person,
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period of time a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the awarded prize in the special gaming state;
With
The pre-determining means includes
In the special gaming state (big bonus (regular bonus)), for games that are less than the maximum number of grants (15) that can be awarded in the special gaming state when the award winning (in the regular bonus winning in the regular bonus) occurs When it is determined to allow the generation of the first grant award with value addition (small role other than JAC), the second award with the game value of the maximum number of grants (15) is given. (JAC) is simultaneously determined to allow the occurrence of,
The derivation control means includes
In the special game, it is simultaneously determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first prize-winning (small role other than JAC) and the generation of the second prize-winning (JAC) are allowed. The display result corresponding to the first award winning and the display result corresponding to the second award winning are within a range derivable within the range of the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the derivation operating means. When included, a control for causing the variable display device to derive the display result corresponding to the second award winning prize (JAC) in preference to the display result corresponding to the first award winning prize (small role other than JAC). Priority derivation control means for performing
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. From a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify one display result among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the step number with respect to the step number of the stepping motor when operated. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means;
Including
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
At least one of the number of steps in the specific variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas when the prior determination means determines that the special winning (special role) is allowed to occur. Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result (display result constituting a chance) for one step number;
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first specific prize winning is allowed, the first specific prize winning (one (1)) is determined for the specific variable display area. The display result which comprises this 1st specific prize-winning (1 sheet (1)) is specified with respect to the step number in which the display result to comprise is located in the said predetermined range, This 1st specific prize-winning (1 sheet) (1) A first specifying the specific display result (a display result forming a chance eye) with respect to at least one number of steps different from the number of steps specifying the display result configuring the display result A first specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern;
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the second specific prize winning (1 (2) / 1 (3)) is allowed, the specific variable display area The second specific award (1 (2) / 2) / the second specific award (1 (2) / The number of steps that is different from the number of steps that identifies the display result that constitutes one (3)) and that identifies the display result that constitutes the second specific award (1 (2) / 1 (3)) A second specific award winning control pattern selection means for selecting a second specific award winning control pattern that specifies the specific display result (a display result constituting a chance eye) with respect to at least one of the steps. ,
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that no winnings are allowed, the specific display result (chance item) can be obtained from any of the number of steps for the specific variable display area. Non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a display result other than the display result comprising
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result (chance item) is determined with respect to at least one step number of the number of steps in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. The display results that make up the
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and The first specific award winning control pattern specifies the specific display result (display result constituting a chance eye) with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers specifying the specific display result;
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number, and the display result is derived to the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed. That is, only one control pattern is applied to the determination result of one pre-determining means, and it is not necessary to select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. It does not complicate the control when making it.
In addition, it may be determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted by the pre-determining means, or the decision that the occurrence of the first specific prize is allowed, and the first specific prize is generated. If no decision has been made or the decision to allow the generation of the second specific prize-winning has been made and the second specific prize-winning has not been generated, any of the prizes will be generated by the predetermining means. Since it is possible to derive a specific display result that is not derived when it is not permitted, a player who is allowed to generate a special prize by deriving a specific display result Can raise the sense of expectation.
In addition, in the state where it is not determined that the special winning is permitted, when the predetermining means does not allow any winning, that is, in the state that occupies most of the normal times, a specific display result is derived. In this case, it is possible to derive a specific display result by making a determination to allow the first specific prize or the second specific prize to be generated by the prior determination means. Thus, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player.
In addition, when it is determined that the generation of the first specific prize winning is permitted, the operation timing of the derivation operation means from which the display result corresponding to the first specific prize winning is derived; Since the timing of operation of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result corresponding to the second specific award winning is different from each other when the determination that the occurrence of the specific award winning is permitted is made, It is impossible to operate the derivation operation means at a timing that does not miss both the first specific prize and the second specific prize and the derivation operation means at a timing that does not miss either one When the above operation is performed, the other is surely missed, and in this case, a specific display result can be derived. Therefore, even a highly skilled player who plays a game so as not to miss the winning prize, the percentage of the specific display result to be derived is not extremely low. It is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the occurrence of a transitional role for the other players.
In addition, when it is determined to allow the generation of the first prize-winning in which the number of game values to be awarded is smaller than the second prize-winning when being controlled in the special gaming state, It is also determined that the generation of the prize-winning is allowed, and the display result corresponding to the second prize-winning is derived to the active line in preference to the display result corresponding to the first prize-winning. Since it is possible to obtain the game value of the number of grants and to minimize the number of game values to be granted from being less than the maximum number of grants, the player can be acquired in the special game state It is possible to prevent the gaming value from decreasing.
Incidentally, to uniquely select the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is to always select the same control pattern when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same, This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.
A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention,
Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R). A slot machine in which one game is finished by displaying a result and a winning can be generated according to a display result of the variable display device,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the first specific prize-winning (1 (1)) accompanied by the awarding of the gaming value and the first specific prize-winning (1 sheet) (1)) a plurality of types of prizes (small role) including the second specific prizes (1 (2) / 1 (3)) with the same number of gaming values as those for the game, Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a special prize (special role) with a transition to an advantageous special gaming state (big bonus, challenge bonus),
Determination that the occurrence of the special prize (special role) is permitted by the pre-determining means, and the occurrence of the special prize is not permitted when the special prize (special role) is not generated ( Carry-over means to carry over the special role winning flag) after the next game,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas ;
A variable display corresponding to the operation of the derivation operating means by stopping the variable display of the symbol within a predetermined maximum stop delay time from the operation of the derivation operating means in accordance with the determination of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the area (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
Based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied, a game is played in a state that is more than the normal game state until a predetermined end condition that is satisfied when the total amount of gaming value reaches a predetermined amount is satisfied. Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state that is an advantageous gaming state for a person,
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period of time a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the awarded prize in the special gaming state;
With
The pre-determining means includes
In the special gaming state (big bonus (regular bonus)), for games that are less than the maximum number of grants (15) that can be awarded in the special gaming state when the award winning (in the regular bonus winning in the regular bonus) occurs When it is determined to allow the generation of the first grant award with value addition (small role other than JAC), the second award with the game value of the maximum number of grants (15) is given. (JAC) is simultaneously determined to allow the occurrence of,
The derivation control means includes
In the special game, it is simultaneously determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first prize-winning (small role other than JAC) and the generation of the second prize-winning (JAC) are allowed. The display result corresponding to the first award winning and the display result corresponding to the second award winning are within a range derivable within the range of the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the derivation operating means. When included, a control for causing the variable display device to derive the display result corresponding to the second award winning prize (JAC) in preference to the display result corresponding to the first award winning prize (small role other than JAC). Priority derivation control means for performing
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, one display among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps relative to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated A control pattern for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to a combination of the determination result of the pre-determining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the result A selection means;
Including
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
At least one of the number of steps in the specific variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas when the prior determination means determines that the special winning (special role) is allowed to occur. Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result (display result constituting a chance) for one step number;
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first specific prize winning is allowed, the first specific prize winning (one (1)) is determined for the specific variable display area. The display result which comprises this 1st specific prize-winning (1 sheet (1)) is specified with respect to the step number in which the display result to comprise is located in the said predetermined range, This 1st specific prize-winning (1 sheet) (1) A first specifying the specific display result (a display result forming a chance eye) with respect to at least one number of steps different from the number of steps specifying the display result configuring the display result A first specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a specific award winning control pattern;
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the second specific prize winning (1 (2) / 1 (3)) is allowed, the specific variable display area The second specific award (1 (2) / 2) / the second specific award (1 (2) / The number of steps that is different from the number of steps that identifies the display result that constitutes one (3)) and that identifies the display result that constitutes the second specific award (1 (2) / 1 (3)) A second specific award winning control pattern selection means for selecting a second specific award winning control pattern that specifies the specific display result (a display result constituting a chance eye) with respect to at least one of the steps. ,
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that no winnings are allowed, the specific display result (chance item) can be obtained from any of the number of steps for the specific variable display area. Non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a display result other than the display result comprising
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result (chance item) is determined with respect to at least one step number of the number of steps in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. The display results that make up the
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and The first specific award winning control pattern specifies the specific display result (display result constituting a chance eye) with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers specifying the specific display result;
It is characterized by that .
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. The determination result of the predetermining means from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area where the derivation operation means is operated In addition, a control pattern corresponding to the combination of display results of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns Need not be further selected, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
In addition, it may be determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted by the pre-determining means, or the decision that the occurrence of the first specific prize is allowed, and the first specific prize is generated. If no decision has been made or the decision to allow the generation of the second specific prize-winning has been made and the second specific prize-winning has not been generated, any of the prizes will be generated by the predetermining means. Since it is possible to derive a specific display result that is not derived when it is not permitted, a player who is allowed to generate a special prize by deriving a specific display result Can raise the sense of expectation.
In addition, in the state where it is not determined that the special winning is permitted, when the predetermining means does not allow any winning, that is, in the state that occupies most of the normal times, a specific display result is derived. In this case, it is possible to derive a specific display result by making a determination to allow the first specific prize or the second specific prize to be generated by the prior determination means. Thus, it is possible to derive a specific display result at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player.
In addition, when it is determined that the generation of the first specific prize winning is permitted, the operation timing of the derivation operation means from which the display result corresponding to the first specific prize winning is derived; Since the timing of operation of the derivation operation means for deriving the display result corresponding to the second specific award winning is different from each other when the determination that the occurrence of the specific award winning is permitted is made, It is impossible to operate the derivation operation means at a timing that does not miss both the first specific prize and the second specific prize and the derivation operation means at a timing that does not miss either one When the above operation is performed, the other is surely missed, and in this case, a specific display result can be derived. Therefore, even a highly skilled player who plays a game so as not to miss the winning prize, the percentage of the specific display result to be derived is not extremely low. It is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the occurrence of a transitional role for the other players.
In addition, when it is determined to allow the generation of the first prize-winning in which the number of game values to be awarded is smaller than the second prize-winning when being controlled in the special gaming state, It is also determined that the generation of the prize-winning is allowed, and the display result corresponding to the second prize-winning is derived to the active line in preference to the display result corresponding to the first prize-winning. Since it is possible to obtain the game value of the number of grants and to minimize the number of game values to be granted from being less than the maximum number of grants, the player can be acquired in the special game state It is possible to prevent the gaming value from decreasing.
Note that when the control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the prior determination unit and the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. If the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is the same, the same control pattern is always selected. If the determination result of the predetermining means is different, or the display result has already been derived. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the display results of the variable display areas are different.
In claims 1 and 2, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, in the first and second aspects, the award winning is only required to be given game value, and may be for the same type of winning award in the normal game and the special game. Alternatively, different types of awarded prizes may be targeted.
Further, in claims 1 and 2, the maximum number of grants that can be given when the prize is awarded in the special gaming state is the value of the game value that may be given when the prize is awarded in the special game. The largest number of gaming values, for example, when the gaming value can be given more than that in a special gaming state, the number of gaming values is less than the number of gaming values Also good.
Further, in claims 1 and 2, the second award winning with the maximum number of gaming values given is that the maximum number of gaming values is given when the second award winning occurs alone. Not only those, but a plurality of second prizes that are awarded at the same time (for example, a plurality of prize lines are lined up with a second prize-giving pattern, etc.) and the maximum number of prizes for gaming is given. Including.
Further, in claims 1 and 2, the first prize-winning includes the first specific prize-winning and the second specific prize-winning.

A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or 2 ,
A winning determination means for determining whether a winning has occurred or not according to the display result of the variable display device;
The winning determination means determines whether or not the second award winning has occurred according to the display result of the variable display device only in the special gaming state (JAC is awarded only in the regular bonus and the challenge bonus) set to target),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second prize-winning is a prize that is targeted only in the special gaming state and is not a subject in other gaming states, and the second prize-winning can be generated only in the special gaming state. Thus, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the special game state and the other game states, and it is possible to differentiate between the special game state and the other game states.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or 3 ,
The control pattern selection unit determines that the first determination unit allows the generation of the first prize-winning prize (small role other than JAC) and the generation of the second prize-winning prize (JAC). Of the number of steps, the display result constituting the first prize-winning prize (small role other than JAC) and the display result constituting the second prize-winning prize (JAC) are drawn together. Including a second award winning priority control pattern selection means for selecting a second award winning priority control pattern that specifies a display result constituting the second award winning (JAC) for the possible number of steps.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the step of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived in the situation where the display result has not yet been derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-decision means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived for the number, and the display result is derived to the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed. That is, only one control pattern is applied to the determination result of one pre-determining means, and it is not necessary to select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns, and the display result of the variable display device is derived. It does not complicate the control when making it.
Incidentally, to uniquely select the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is to always select the same control pattern when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same, This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the determination results of the prior determination means are different.

The slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 2 or 3 ,
The control pattern selection unit determines that the first determination unit allows the generation of the first prize-winning prize (small role other than JAC) and the generation of the second prize-winning prize (JAC). Of the number of steps, the display result constituting the first prize-winning prize (small role other than JAC) and the display result constituting the second prize-winning prize (JAC) are drawn together. Including a second award winning priority control pattern selection means for selecting a second award winning priority control pattern that specifies a display result constituting the second award winning (JAC) for the possible number of steps.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. The determination result of the predetermining means from the plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display area where the derivation operation means is operated In addition, a control pattern corresponding to the combination of display results of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control for deriving the display result to the corresponding variable display area is performed. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns Need not be further selected, and the control for deriving the display result of the variable display device is not complicated.
Note that when the control pattern corresponding to the combination of the determination result of the prior determination unit and the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. If the display result of the variable display area for which the display result has already been derived is the same, the same control pattern is always selected. If the determination result of the predetermining means is different, or the display result has already been derived. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the display results of the variable display areas are different.

In addition, the control pattern for uniquely specifying the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated in claims 1 to 5 means that the derivation operation means is operated. Is the control pattern that always specifies the same display result as the derived display result when the number of steps at the same time is the same, for example, the number of individual steps, or a step number unit that is continuous within a certain range (for example, The amount of variation in which the amount of variation until the display result is derived is determined for each identification code (for example, symbol number, etc.) that can identify the step number unit). A control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result derived from the table with respect to the number of steps when the derivation operation means is operated, the number of individual steps, or Step at the time when the derivation operation means is operated from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each step number unit that is continuous within a certain range or for each identification code that can identify the step number unit. A control pattern that uniquely identifies a display result derived for a number is applicable. In addition, from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated, pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be drawn is maximized within a predetermined pull-in range, so that the display result is not derivation prohibited. For those that perform kick-off control that draws display results other than the display results for which derivation is prohibited, if the display result derived from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated is uniquely specified, This corresponds to the control pattern of the present invention.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a pivoted front door.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the outer periphery of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, “plum”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a reel sensor 33 that detects a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with white light from the back, Is provided.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 3) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white type liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and includes a transmission region corresponding to the see-through window 3 in the display region 51a, and The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. In addition, the liquid crystal display includes a non-glare type liquid crystal display in which the surface of the liquid crystal panel is subjected to non-glare processing and a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing (gloss processing) is performed. In this case, a glare type liquid crystal display in which the surface of the display area 51a is subjected to glare processing is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmission area. (Not shown) is provided.

  The liquid crystal display 51 is configured by enclosing a liquid crystal element between liquid crystal panels in which a plurality of pixels are formed in a matrix. The voltage of each pixel is determined by a drive signal output from a liquid crystal driver (not shown). The transmittance of light is changed by changing the alignment state of the liquid crystal element by controlling.

  Each pixel of the liquid crystal display 51 includes a liquid crystal element among the white light of the backlight on the back side and the white light of the reel LED 55 (however, in the pattern portion, the white light may be lost depending on the color of the pattern). R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light are transmitted in accordance with the orientation state, and a color image is displayed.

  Each pixel displays 32 gradations for each of RGB. The RGB value of each pixel is expressed as (R, G, B). If it is (0, 0, 0), the white light of the backlight or the white light of the reel LED 55 is not transmitted, but the display is black. , (31, 31, 31), the display is transparent, and the portion of the symbol drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is displayed in the color, and the other portions are displayed in white. For RGB values other than (0, 0, 0) and (31, 31, 31), the red, green, and blue colors become stronger as each value increases.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number of the bet, using a credit, a predetermined number of bet numbers determined according to the game state within the range (in this embodiment, a normal game state, which will be described later, In RT (1) (replay time (1)), RT (2) (replay time (2)) and RT (3) (replay time (3)), 3 in the regular bonus and CT (challenge time) described later 1), the MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting, the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (credit and bet amount The payout switch 10 is operated when the medals used for the normal operation are returned), the start switch 7 is operated when the game is started, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are each stopped. A stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, a selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57 that are operated when browsing or initializing game history data relating to a game that has already been performed, and selecting an effect mode, are provided so as to be operable by the player. It has been.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the reel sensor 33, and the reel LED 55, and a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. A hopper tank (not shown), a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 35 for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34, and a power box (shown) Abbreviation) is provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L4 (see FIG. 1) becomes effective, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. In this embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state described later, RT (1), RT (2) and RT (3), and in the regular bonus and CT described later. Is one. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3 set across the symbols lined up to the right, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, Four types of pay lines L4 set across the lower row of the reel 2R, that is, the symbols arranged in the lower right, are determined as the pay lines, and the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) and RT (3 ), When the specified number of bets is set, all of the pay lines L1 to L4 are valid. In the regular bonus and CT, when the specified number of bets is set, the pay lines L1, L2 are set. It becomes effective. In the present embodiment, a virtual pay line Lv set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is provided. Unlike the winning line, the virtual winning line is not a target for determining a combination of winning symbols. The virtual pay line will be described later.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, a combination of symbols) on any activated pay line (hereinafter referred to as an effective line). (Also referred to as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R), a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. . Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on multiple active lines, the number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activation line is totaled, and the total number of medals Will be given to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any active line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  In particular, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, voltages are supplied to at least a sub-control unit 91 (CPU 91a) described later and a display control circuit 92 described later, among the power supply lines that supply the voltage generated by the power supply substrate 100 to each unit. Power supply line for supplying voltage to a later-described liquid crystal drive circuit 215 mounted on the liquid crystal display 51, a power supply line for supplying voltage to an LED drive circuit 93 described later, and a voltage applied to a reel LED 55 described later. A power supply line to be supplied is wired electrically independently.

  Note that electrically independent wiring means that these wiring lines are provided in an electrically non-contact state even when they are wired on the same cable or the same substrate.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 to be applied and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set between an interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the number of times) and a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a).

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Interrupt processing (main) is executed. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 at the time of start-up, and sets the stop function valid / invalid and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 is acquired only at the time of activation, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 29 is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected with the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 described above, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the connected liquid crystal display 51, an LED LED circuit 93 that controls driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that provides a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the initialization command from the CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, or a switch detection circuit 96 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90; Clock device 97 for outputting time information including date information and time information, The CPU 91a receives various commands for performing the presentation upon receiving the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the detection of the switches connected to the presentation control board 90. Then, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Unlike the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a executes interrupt processing based on interrupts other than the interruption interrupt processing (sub) when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT). Even if it is in the middle, interrupt the corresponding process and execute the command reception interrupt process, and execute the command reception interrupt process with the highest priority even if other interrupts except the power interruption interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time It is supposed to be.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the display control circuit 92 mounted on the effect control board 90. As shown in the figure, the display control circuit 92 includes a VDP (Video Display Processr) 141 and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 142. The VDP 141 has a high-speed drawing function and a display output function for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51, and executes image processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control unit 91. The CGROM 142 stores image element data and moving image data (effect data) displayed as effects on the liquid crystal display 51.

  The VDP 141 includes a host interface 151, a transfer control circuit 152, a CGROM interface 153, a drawing circuit 154, a temporary storage memory 155, a frame buffer memory 156, a display circuit 157, and a moving image decoder 158. Yes.

  The host interface 151 includes an address input terminal and a data input / output terminal for exchanging various data with the sub-control unit 91. The transfer control circuit 152 performs control to transfer the effect data read from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on a command from the sub control unit 91. The CGROM interface 153 includes an address output terminal and a data input terminal for reading effect data stored in the CGROM 142.

  The drawing circuit 154 executes a drawing process for creating image data of an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the effect data stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The temporary storage memory 155 is composed of, for example, a VRAM (Video RAM) or the like, and includes an effect data area for storing effect data read from the CGROM 142. Further, in the temporary storage memory 155, based on a command from the sub-control unit 91, information indicating the rendering mode, information indicating that the reel transparent object is set in the transparent area, and information indicating that the transparent area is semi-transparent Etc. are also memorized.

  The frame buffer memory 156 is configured using, for example, a VRAM that is different from the temporary storage memory 155, and stores image data of an image created by a drawing process by the drawing circuit 154. The frame buffer memory 156 has two frames, and switching between image data writing and reading is performed every frame period. The display circuit 157 uses the image data read from the frame buffer memory 156 (for reading) as gradation data, and outputs the image signal to which the synchronization signal is added to the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51. The moving picture decoder 158 is a circuit that decodes the moving picture data when it is read out from the CGROM 142 as effect data.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  In addition, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are regular bonus, CT, normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and RT (3) as gaming states, and regulation of betting numbers corresponding to the regular bonus and CT. 1 is defined as the number, and 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) and RT (3). For this reason, when the gaming state is the regular bonus and CT, it is possible to start the game when the bet number is set to 1, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) or RT In any of (3), if 3 is set as the bet number, the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state are set, a winning line (regular bonus, CT, L1, L2, normal gaming) according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L4. In the state, RT (1) to (3), L1 to L4) are activated, and if the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is 1 (regular bonus, CT), 1 is set as the bet number. The winning lines L1 and L2 are activated at the time of setting, and if the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is 3 (normal gaming state, RT (1) to (3)), 3 is set as the betting number. At that time, the winning lines L1 to L4 are activated.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is awarded when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged on the effective line. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later with the exception of CT, and to set the winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 5 shows a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (0 to 27) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a challenge bonus (1), a challenge bonus (2) are cherry, watermelon, 1 (1), One (2), one (3), one (4), bell, and JAC are defined as replay (1) and replay (2). In addition, the combinations of the roles in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), big bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1) + Replay (2) 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), JAC + Cherry, JAC + Watermelon, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 (2), JAC + 1 (3), JAC + 1 Sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4) is defined. That is, the total number of combinations and combinations of combinations is 28.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), or CT. Depending on whether the bonus is a regular bonus, the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to lottery differ. Further, when the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), whether or not any special role is being carried over (in the winning flag of the special role) Depending on whether or not any special winning combination has already been set, the combination of winning combinations and winning combinations is also different. In this embodiment, it is one of the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), and the combination of the combination and combination that is the target of the lottery during the carryover of any special combination The combination is also subject to lottery even when the gaming state is CT. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and any special combination is carried over at RT (1). If not, “1” is set as the state number, and if no special role is carried over in RT (2), “2” is set as the state number, and any special in RT (3) If no combination is carried over, “3” is set as the state number, and if any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “4” is set as the state number, and RT (1) If any special combination is carried over at "5", the state number is set to "5". If any special combination is carried over at RT (2), the state number is set to "6". If any special combination is carried over at RT (3), the state number is set to “7”, and if it is a regular bonus, the state number is set to “8”, If it is controlled and is not controlled by any of RT (1) to (3), "9" is set as the state number, controlled by CT, and controlled by RT (1) Is set to “10” as the state number, controlled by CT, and controlled by RT (2), “11” is set as the state number, controlled by CT, and set to RT (3). When controlled, "12" is set as the state number.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the game state is one of the normal game state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), and no special role is carried over, that is, as a state number When any of “0” to “3” is set, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2), big bonus (1) + cherry Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 ( 1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), Like (3), one (1) +1 Like (2) +1 sheets (3) +1 sheets (4), the bell, that is, the combination of winning and prize of winning numbers 0-20 are subject to internal lottery. Further, the game state is any one of the normal game state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), and any special role is carried over, that is, “4” to “4” as the state number When any of “7” is set, or when the gaming state is CT, that is, when any of “9” to “12” is set as the state number, replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 ( 4) The bell, that is, the combination of the combination of the combination numbers 12 to 20 and the combination of combinations is the target of the internal lottery. In addition, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, when the state number is set to “8”, JAC, JAC + Cherry, JAC + Watermelon, JAC + 1 sheet (1), JAC + 1 sheet (2), JAC + 1 sheet (3), JAC + 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4), that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 21 is the target of the internal lottery. Depending on the gaming state, the combination that constitutes the combination that is the subject of the internal lottery or the combination that is the subject of the internal lottery is the target of winning according to the gaming state. All small roles and re-playing roles are eligible for winning.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on the active line for the left reel in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), CT and regular bonus. Medals will be paid out. Note that the symbol “Cherry” wins when it stops at the top or bottom of the left reel, so in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) Since the combination of cherries is aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4, and the cherries are won on the two winning lines, the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) and In RT (3), four medals are paid out. The watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT. To be paid out. One (1) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-bell-bell” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT, One medal is paid out. One (2) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-bell-bell” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT, In the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and a challenge bonus, one medal is paid out. One (3) is awarded when the combination of “black BAR-bell-bell” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT, One medal is paid out. One (4) is awarded when the combination of “orange-bell-replay” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT. A medal is paid out. The Bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT. To be paid out.

  JAC wins and 15 medals are paid out when a combination of “bell-bell-replay” is arranged on the active line in CT and regular bonus. In the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and RT (3), JAC is not eligible for winning. In addition, in the regular bonus, cherry, watermelon, 1 sheet (1) to (4), bell and JAC are always won simultaneously, and cherry, watermelon, 1 sheet (1) to (4), bell, as described later Since the control for aligning the JAC combinations is prioritized over the combination of JAC, the JAC always wins and 15 medals are paid out when any small combination is won in the regular bonus.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT. Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “orange-bell-bell” is aligned on the active line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT. When winning a replay (1) or replay (2), there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again. This is substantially the same as paying out the number of medals (ordinary gaming state, 3 for RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), 1 for CT).

  The big bonus is a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or “white 7” in the normal gaming state and any of the winning lines L1 to L4 in RT (1), RT (2), RT (3). -Winners are awarded when the combination of "White 7-Red 7" is complete. In this embodiment, when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is completed, the big bonus to be awarded is the big bonus (1), and the combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is prepared. The big bonus that is sometimes won is the big bonus (2). When the big bonus (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1). When shifting to the big bonus (1), the shift to the regular bonus is performed simultaneously with the shift to the big bonus (1). The regular bonus is a gaming state in which the winning probability of a small role is higher than the normal gaming state, and when 12 games are consumed or when 8 games are won (any kind of role is acceptable), whichever comes first End with. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus (1) has not ended when the regular bonus ends, the process proceeds to the regular bonus again and is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonus (1) ends. That is, during the big bonus (1), the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus (1) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (1) exceeds 345. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1), the big bonus (1) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (2). If you move to Big Bonus (2), you will be transferred to Regular Bonus at the same time as Big Bonus (2). Then, it is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonus (2) ends. That is, during the big bonus (2), the regular bonus is always controlled as in the big bonus (1). The big bonus (2) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (2) exceeds 250. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus (2), the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The challenge bonus is a combination of “orange-replay-bell” or “bell-replay-replay” in the normal gaming state and any of the winning lines L1 to L4 in RT (1), RT (2), RT (3). ”Will be awarded when the combination is complete. In this embodiment, the challenge bonus that is awarded when the combination of “orange-replay-bell” is complete is the challenge bonus (1), and the challenge that is awarded when the combination of “bell-replay-replay” is complete. The bonus is a challenge bonus (2). When the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3) to the challenge bonus. When the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) wins at RT (1), RT (2) or RT (3), the gaming state of RT (1), RT (2) or RT (3) ( While maintaining the replay winning probability), it shifts to the challenge bonus. In the challenge bonus, the system shifts to CT (challenge time) simultaneously with the transition to the challenge bonus. In CT, a predetermined reel (the left reel in this embodiment) is limited in the time from when a stop operation is detected until the corresponding reel stops, that is, the drawing range of symbols is more than in the normal gaming state. However, it is a gaming state in which winnings of all small roles are uniformly allowed, and the game ends in one game. While the gaming state is in CT, the CT flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the challenge bonus has not ended when the CT ends, the process proceeds to CT again, and the CT is repeatedly controlled until the challenge bonus ends. That is, during the challenge bonus, the CT is always controlled. The challenge bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the challenge bonus exceeds 150. While the gaming state is in the challenge bonus, a challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “white 7-white 7-red 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Also, when it is necessary to distinguish between the challenge bonus by “Orange-Replay-Bell” and the challenge bonus by “Bell-Replay-Replay”, they shall be referred to as challenge bonus (1) and challenge bonus (2), respectively. . The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the challenge bonus (1), and the challenge bonus (2) described above may be collectively referred to as “bonus” in some cases.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  The gaming state is one of the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), and no special role is carried over, that is, "0" to "3" as state numbers Is set, the winning combination table is referred to, and combinations of combinations 0 and 20 of the combination numbers, that is, big bonus (1) [composition number 0], big bonus (2) [combination Number 1], regular bonus [port number 2], challenge bonus (1) [port number 3], challenge bonus (2) [port number 4], big bonus (1) + cherry [port number 4], big bonus ( 2) + cherry [role number 5], big bonus (1) +1 (1) [role 6], big bonus (1) +1 (2) [role 7], big bonus (1) +1 ( 3) [Position number 8], Bonus (2) +1 (1) [Number 9], Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) [Number 10], Big Bonus (2) +1 (3) [Number 11], Replay (1 ) [Hand number 12], Replay (1) + Replay (2) [Hand number 13], Cherry [Hand number 14], Watermelon [Hand number 15], 1 sheet (1) [Hand number 16], 1 sheet ( 2) [Hand number 17], 1 sheet (3) [Hand number 18], 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4) [Hand number 19], Bell [Hand number 20 ] Are sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  Further, the game state is any one of the normal game state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), and any special role is carried over, that is, “4” to “4” as the state number. When any of “7” is set, or when the gaming state is CT, that is, when any of “9” to “12” is set as the state number, refer to the winning combination table Then, the combination of the combination of combination numbers 12 to 20, that is, replay (1) [portion number 12], replay (1) + replay (2) [portion number 13], cherry [portion number 14], watermelon [portion Number 15], 1 sheet (1) [Hand number 16], 1 sheet (2) [Hand number 17], 1 sheet (3) [Hand number 18], 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet ( 3) +1 sheet (4) [Position number 19] and Bell [Position number 20] are internal lottery pairs It is read out in the order as a role.

  When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “8” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to, and combinations of the combination and combination after the combination number 21, that is, JAC [portion number 21], JAC + Cherry (1) [Position number 22], JAC + Watermelon [Position number 23], JAC + 1 sheet (1) [Position number 24], JAC + 1 sheet (2) [Position number 25], JAC + 1 sheet (3) [Position number 26 ], JAC + 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4) [port number 27] is sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which a winning flag for a role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles 0 to 3 (special role) is elected, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 11 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 12 to 27 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  In CT, regardless of whether any combination is won or not, a winning flag indicating winning for all types of small combinations is set in the general combination storing work.

  The number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the role-specific table includes big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) +1 (3), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2) ) 1 (3) 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) Bell, JAC, JAC + Cherry, JAC + Watermelon, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 (2) , JAC + 1 (3), J C + 1 sheets (1) +1 Like (2) +1 sheets (3) storage address of the determination value of the number of +1 sheets (4) are registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Challenge Bonus (1), Challenge Bonus (2), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1) Big Bonus (1) +1 (2) Big Bonus (1) +1 (3) Big Bonus (2) +1 (1) Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) Big Bonus (2) +1 (3) is a role that is subject to an internal lottery when the special game state and any special roles are not carried over in RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), and the state number “ Storage addresses for the number of determination values corresponding to “0” to “3” are registered. For the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), and challenge bonus (2), the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of judgment values is registered individually according to the set value Has been. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3) have a common flag of 1, which is the same regardless of the set value. The storage address for the number of judgment values is registered.

  Replay (1) is a role that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT Corresponding to the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the numbers “0” to “2”, “4” to “6”, “9” to “11”, and the state numbers “3”, “7”, “12” A storage address for the number of determination values to be registered is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay (1) + Replay (2) is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT Storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to the state numbers “0”, “4”, “9” and the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to the state numbers “1”, “5”, “10” A storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the state numbers “2”, “6”, “11”, a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the state numbers “3”, “7”, “12”, Are registered respectively. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) are all gaming states except for regular bonuses (normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) and CT ) Regardless of whether the special combination is carried over or not, it is a combination subject to internal lottery. A storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to “12” is registered. The common flag for these roles is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Watermelon, 1 (1) + 1 (2) + 1 (3) + 1 (4), Bell is all gaming states except regular bonus (normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT In (3) and CT), regardless of whether or not a special combination is carried over, it is a combination subject to internal lottery. It is registered. The common flag for these roles is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Regular bonus for JAC, JAC + Cherry, JAC + Watermelon, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 (2), JAC + 1 (3), JAC + 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) The storage addresses of the number of judgment values corresponding to the state number “8”, which are the targets for the internal lottery, are respectively registered. The common flag for these roles is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, the address ADD is in a game state of state numbers “0” to “3”, that is, in a normal game state, in which no special role is carried over in RT (1), RT (2) or RT (3), This is an address that is referred to when the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 1. At this time, the value 5 stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are in the gaming state of state numbers “0” to “3”, when the target role of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6, respectively. The address to be referenced. Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 have a big bonus (2) and a set value of 1 to 6 in the game state of state numbers “0” to “3”, respectively. An address that is sometimes referred to. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 have a challenge bonus (1) and a set value of 1 to 6, respectively, in the game state of state numbers “0” to “3”. An address that is sometimes referred to. Addresses ADD + 36, ADD + 38, ADD + 40, ADD + 42, ADD + 44, and ADD + 46 are in the game state with state numbers “0” to “3”, and the target combination of the internal lottery is a challenge bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. An address that is sometimes referred to.

  Big bonuses (1) in the game state of these state numbers “0” to “3”, that is, the normal game state, and no special role is carried over in RT (1), RT (2) or RT (3) , Big Bonus (2), Challenge Bonus (1), Challenge Bonus (2) are individually stored with the number of determination values according to the set value, and different numbers of determination values are stored. Thus, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations will be different.

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (1) + cherry in the gaming state of the state numbers “0” to “3”. The address ADD + 50 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the target character of the internal lottery is the big bonus (2) + cherry in the gaming state of the state numbers “0” to “3”, and the address ADD + 52 Is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the target of the internal lottery is big bonus (1) +1 (1) in the gaming state of state numbers “0” to “3”. ADD + 54 is entered regardless of the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2) in the gaming state of state numbers “0” to “3”. The address ADD + 56 is set regardless of the set value when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (1) +1 (3) in the gaming state of the state numbers “0” to “3”. The address ADD + 58 is referred to, regardless of the set value when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (2) +1 (1) in the gaming state of the state numbers “0” to “3”. The address ADD + 60 is related to the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is the big bonus (2) +1 (2) in the gaming state of the state numbers “0” to “3”. The address ADD + 62 is an internal lottery with a big bonus (2) +1 (3) in the gaming state of the state numbers “0” to “3”. An address to be referred to regardless of the set value.

  The address ADD + 64 is in the state numbers “0” to “2”, “4” to “6”, “9” to “11”, that is, the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3 ) Or CT, the address to be referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination of the internal lottery is replay (1), and the address ADD + 66 has the state numbers “3”, “7”, “12”, In other words, in the state where RT (3) or both RT (3) and CT are controlled, the address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the target part of the internal lottery is Replay (1) It is.

  Addresses ADD + 68, ADD + 70, ADD + 72, ADD + 74, ADD + 76, and ADD + 78 are in the state numbers “0”, “4”, and “9”, that is, in the normal gaming state, CT without RT (1) to (3), respectively. Addresses to be referred to when the target combination of internal lottery is replay (1) + replay (2) and the set value is 1 to 6, and addresses ADD + 80, ADD + 82, ADD + 84, ADD + 86, ADD + 88, and ADD + 90 are state numbers. In the case of “1”, “5”, “10”, that is, in the state where RT (1), or both RT (1) and CT are controlled, the target role of the internal lottery is replay (1) + replay, respectively. (2) is an address referred to when the set value is 1 to 6, and addresses ADD + 92 and ADD + 92 ADD + 96, ADD + 98, ADD + 100, and ADD + 102 are internal in the state numbers “2”, “6”, and “11”, that is, in the state controlled by RT (2) or both RT (2) and CT, respectively. Addresses to be referred to when the target role of the lottery is replay (1) + replay (2) and the set value is 1 to 6, and the addresses ADD + 104, ADD + 106, ADD + 108, ADD + 110, ADD + 112, and ADD + 114 have the state number “ In the case of “3”, “7”, “12”, that is, in the state of being controlled by RT (3), or both RT (3) and CT, the target role of the internal lottery is replay (1) + replay ( 2) and an address referred to when the set value is 1 to 6.

  Regarding the replay (1) + replay (2) in the gaming state with the state numbers “0”, “4”, “9”, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, but the same determination value Since the number is stored, the winning probability of replay (1) + replay (2) is the same for any set value. In addition, the gaming state with the state numbers “1”, “5”, “10”, the gaming state with the state numbers “2”, “6”, “11”, the state numbers “3”, “7”, “12” The same applies to the gaming state.

  The address ADD + 116 is an internal lottery when the state numbers are “0” to “3”, that is, in the normal gaming state, in which no special role is carried over in RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) The address ADD + 118 is an address that is referred to when the target combination is cherry, regardless of the setting value. The addresses ADD + 118 are in the state numbers “4” to “7”, “9” to “12”, that is, the normal gaming state , RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), any special combination is carried over, or in CT, when the target lottery of the internal lottery is cherry, regardless of the setting value Address.

  The address ADD + 120 is in the state numbers “0” to “7”, “9” to “12”, that is, in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), CT gaming state, This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the internal lottery is a watermelon.

  The address ADD + 122 is an internal lottery when the state number is “0” to “3”, that is, in a state where no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) The address ADD + 124 is referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination is one (1), and the addresses ADD + 124 are in the state numbers “4” to “7” and “9” to “12”. That is, when a special game is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), or in the CT, the number of target roles for internal lottery is one (1) The address is referenced regardless of the set value.

  The address ADD + 126 is an internal lottery when the state number is “0” to “3”, that is, in a state where no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) The address ADD + 128 is referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination is one (2), and the addresses ADD + 128 are in the state numbers “4” to “7”, “9” to “12”, That is, when a special game is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), or in the CT, there is one target (2) in the internal lottery The address is referenced regardless of the set value.

  The address ADD + 130 is an internal lottery when the state numbers are “0” to “3”, that is, in the state where the special game is not carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) The address ADD + 132 is referred to regardless of the setting value when the target combination is one (3), and the addresses ADD + 132 are in the state numbers “4” to “7” and “9” to “12”. That is, when one of the special roles is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), or in the CT, the number of target roles for internal lottery is one (3) The address is referenced regardless of the set value.

  The address ADD + 134 is used for internal lottery when the state numbers are “0” to “7” and “9” to “12”, that is, in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), CT. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination is 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4).

  The address ADD + 136 is used for the internal lottery in the state numbers “0” to “7”, “9” to “12”, that is, in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), CT. This address is referenced regardless of the setting value when the target combination is a bell.

  The address ADD + 138 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the subject combination of the internal lottery is JAC.

  The address ADD + 140 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the internal lottery target role is JAC + Cherry.

  The address ADD + 142 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the internal lottery target role is JAC + watermelon.

  The address ADD + 144 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target combination of internal lottery is JAC + 1 (1).

  The address ADD + 146 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target combination of internal lottery is JAC + 1 (2).

  The address ADD + 148 is an address that is referred to regardless of the setting value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target combination of the internal lottery is JAC + 1 (3).

  The address ADD + 150 is set to the set value when the state number is “8”, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is JAC + 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) Regardless of the address that is referenced.

  9 to 17 are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. In FIG. 9, when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, in FIG. 10, when no special role is carried over in RT (1), in FIG. 11, any special role is carried out in RT (2). In FIG. 12, when any special combination is not carried over in RT (3) in FIG. 12, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, or RT When the CT is controlled without (1) to (3), when any special role is carried over in RT (1) in FIG. 14, or controlled in both CT and RT (1) 15 when any special role is carried over at RT (2) in FIG. 15 or when controlled by both CT and RT (2) in FIG. When any of the special role in 3) are carried over, or CT and RT when being controlled in both (3) respectively show an example in regular bonus in Figure 17. 9 to 17 each show an example in which the set value is 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9, when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a challenge bonus (1), a challenge bonus (2), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), bells are subject to internal lottery. Further, in this embodiment, with the set value 6, the number of determination values for each combination when no special combination is carried over in the initial gaming state is 10, 15, 15, 10, 4, 8, 2, 2, 2, 4, 4, 4, 2235, 1,312, 64, 200, 200, 200, 50, 1102 are registered, and the big bonus (1) that is the target of the internal lottery is the judgment value first. When the number 10 is added, the addition result overflows and 16374 to 16383 are won when random numbers for internal lottery are acquired.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 25, which is the sum of the determination value number 10 of the big bonus (1) and the determination value number 15 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16359 to 16373, which will overflow, are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the challenge bonus (1) is big when 16344-16358 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the challenge bonus (2) is big when 16334-16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Bonus (1) + Cherry is big when 16330-16333 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry is big when 16322-16329 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery For bonus (1) +1 (1), 16320-16321 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and for big bonus (2) +1 (1), 16318-16319 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery When the big bonus (1) + 1 (2), 16316-16317 are random numbers for internal lottery When the big bonus (2) +1 (1) is obtained as random numbers for internal lottery, the big bonus (2) +1 (2) is 16308-161631 Is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, the big bonus (2) +1 (3) is obtained when 16304-16307 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and replay (1) is 14069-16303. Is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, replay (1) + replay (2) is obtained when 14068 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and 13756 to 14067 are random numbers for internal lottery When the watermelon is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1369 (1) is 13492 When 3691 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1 (2) is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When 1369 (3) is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 13092-13291 is internal lottery. 1 (1) + 1 (2) + 1 (3) + 1 (4) when acquired as random numbers for use, when 13042-13091 is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, , 1194-13041 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, and are determined to be winning. When 0 to 11939 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probabilities of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values are as follows: big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2), big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + 1 (2), big bonus (1) + 1 (3), big bonus ( 2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 For each of (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) bells, 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 11638.4, 1 / 409 1/2048, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1 / 7.33, 1/16384, 1 / 52.5, 1/256, 1 /81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 327.7, and 1 / 14.87.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10, when no special combination is carried over in RT (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2) Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet (3), 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4), Bell is subject to internal lottery, In the embodiment, at the set value 6, RT The number of judgment values of each combination when no special combination is carried over in 1) is 10, 15, 15, 10, 4, 8, 2, 2, 2, 4, 4, 4, 2235, 218, 312, 64, 200, 200, 200, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1638.4, 1/4096, 1/2048, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 75.16, 1 / 52.5, 1/256, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 327.7, and 1 / 14.87.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11, when no special role is carried over in RT (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2) Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet (3), 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4), Bell is subject to internal lottery, In the embodiment, at the set value 6, RT As the number of judgment values of each combination when no special combination is carried over in 2), 10, 15, 15, 10, 4, 8, 2, 2, 2, 4, 4, 4, 2235, 410, 312, 64, 200, 200, 200, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1638.4, 1/4096, 1/2048, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 39.96, 1 / 52.5, 1/256, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 327.7, and 1 / 14.87.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, when no special combination is carried over in RT (3), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2) Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) In the embodiment, at the set value 6, RT As the number of judgment values for each combination when no special combination is carried over in 3), 10, 15, 15, 10, 4, 8, 2, 2, 2, 4, 4, 4, 14140, 16, 312, 64, 200, 200, 200, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1092.3, 1 / 1638.4, 1/4096, 1/2048, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1 / 1.16, 1/1024, 1/52. 5, 1/256, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 81.9, 1 / 327.7, and 1 / 14.87.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, or when controlled by CT without RT (1) to (3), the replay (1 ), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 The number (4) and the bell are subject to internal lottery, and in this embodiment, the number of determination values for each combination when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state at the set value 6 is 2235, 324, 64, 206, 206, 206, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 7.33, 1/16384, 1 / 50.6, 1/256, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5 1 / 327.7,1 / 14.87.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when any special role is carried over in RT (1), or when controlled by both CT and RT (1), replay (1) and replay are performed. (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4 ), The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this embodiment, the number of determination values for each combination when no special combination is carried over at RT (1) at the set value 6 is 2235, 218, 324, 64, 206, 206, 206, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 7.33, 1 / 75.16, 1 / 50.6, 1/256, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1/32 The .7,1 / 14.87.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when any special role is carried over in RT (2), or when controlled by both CT and RT (2), replay (1) and replay are performed. (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4 ), The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this embodiment, the number of determination values of each combination when no special combination is carried over at RT (2) at the set value 6 is 2235, 410, 324, 64, 206, 206, 206, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 7.33, 1 / 39.96, 1 / 50.6, 1/256, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1/32 The .7,1 / 14.87.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, when any special role is carried over in RT (3), or when controlled by both CT and RT (3), replay (1), replay (1) + Replay (2), Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4 ), The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this embodiment, 14140, 16, 324, the number of judgment values for each combination when no special combination is carried over at RT (3) at the set value 6 64, 206, 206, 206, 50, 1102 are registered, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.16, 1/1024, 1 / 50.6, 1/256, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1/327 The 7,1 / 14.87.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the regular bonus, JAC, JAC + cherry, JAC + watermelon, JAC + 1 sheet (1), JAC + 1 sheet (2), JAC + 1 sheet (3), JAC + 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 15320, 324, 64, 206, 206, 206, and 50 are registered as the number of judgment values for each combination in sheet (3) +1 sheet (4), respectively, and the approximate winning probability of each combination is 1 /1.07, 1 / 50.6, 1/256, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, 1 / 79.5, and 1 / 327.7.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, the start address of the area where the data for table creation is stored from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) The difference up to the address where the index data indicating is stored is registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, lose, cherry, watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (2), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), Bell, Replay (1), Replay (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (1) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (1) +1 (3), Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4 ), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Big Bo -Eggplant (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (3), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 ( 3) + 1 (4), Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Challenge Bonus (1) (+ Lost), Challenge Bonus (1) + Cherry, Challenge Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Challenge Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (1) + 1 (3) ), Challenge Bonus (1) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), Challenge Bonus (1) + Bell, Challenge Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Challenge Bo Eggplant (1) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), Challenge Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Challenge Bonus (2) + Cherry, Challenge Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Challenge Bonus (2) + 1 (1 ), Challenge Bonus (2) +1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) +1 (3), Challenge Bonus (2) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), Challenge Bonus (2) + Bell, Challenge Bonus (2) + Replay (1), Challenge Bonus (2) + Replay (1) + Replay (2), JAC, JAC + Cherry, JAC + Watermelon, JAC + 1 (1), JAC + 1 Sheets (2), JAC + 1 sheet (3), JAC + 1 sheet (1) +1 sheet (2) +1 sheet (3) +1 sheet (4), all small roles (replay during CT (1), lip A (1) + replay (2) is not elected), all small roles + replay (1) (when replay (1) is elected during CT), all small roles + replay (1) + replay ( 2) For each of (when Replay (1) + Replay (2) is won in CT), index data indicating the start address of the area where the data for table creation is stored is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied (for example, when winning big bonus (1) + replay (1), when winning big bonus (2) + replay (1), In this case, the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. It will be.

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may vary depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data , It is possible to specify the address of the number of frame data to be referred to according to each situation, and it is necessary according to each situation from this identified address. It has to be able to identify the lead-frame number data. In particular, in this embodiment, even when the stopped position of the stopped reel is the same, when the stopped operation position of the stopped reel is different, the address data of the different number of drawing frame number data is registered for each rotating reel. Even if the stopped positions of the stopped reels are the same, it is possible to specify the required number of drawn frame numbers according to the stop operation position of the stopped reels. Even if the reel stop status and the stop operation position of a stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of drawn frame data when the same number of drawn frame number data is applied. In such a case, the same number of drawn frame data is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined with respect to one reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned from the reel reference position. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  As described above, in the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data, the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position as shown in FIGS. In this embodiment, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are positioned at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) located in the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3. It is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn when an operation is detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. Acquires the address of the data for the number of drawn frames corresponding to each reel corresponding to the rotating state of the reel, and develops the data for the number of drawn frames for each reel stored at the acquired address to create a stop control table for all the reels. .

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stopped frame and the number of pull-in number data of the unstopped reel corresponding to the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained. The number-of-drawing frame number data stored in each reel is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3).

  The table index of this embodiment stores only one address as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. Furthermore, one table creation data includes one table data. Only one address is stored as an address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  In this embodiment, except for the stop control table applied during CT, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of frames to be drawn. It is possible to stop. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position. On the other hand, among the stop control tables applied during CT, in the stop control table for a predetermined specific reel (the left reel in this embodiment) of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, the table is retracted. A value of 0 or 1 is determined as the number of frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of one frame symbol after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the symbol stop position can be designated from a range of a maximum of two frames (two symbols) including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. Further, in the stop control table for reels other than a specific reel, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of frames to be drawn in the same manner as the stop control table applied outside CT, and after the stop operation is detected It is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 frames. That is, the symbol stop position can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames (5 symbols) including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected.

  In this embodiment, if no winning combination is won in the gaming state except CT, a stop control table is created in which the number of draw-in frames in which no winning combination is aligned with the active line is created, and the reels are stopped. Control is performed.

  If any of the roles in the gaming state other than CT is won alone, the winning combination will be pulled in as much as possible in the range of 4 frames so that the winning combination will be aligned with the active line, and the winning combination will not be aligned with the active line In this way, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in within the range of 4 frames is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  When a plurality of types of small roles (JAC and other small roles) with different payout numbers are won in the gaming state excluding CT, the first stop reel (hereinafter, the first stopped reel is referred to as the first stop reel, The second stop reel may be called the second stop reel, and the last stop reel may be called the third stop reel). If the drawing is maximized in the range of 4 frames so that the composition symbols are aligned with the effective line, the composition of the small role with the largest number of payouts is not drawn in the range of 4 frames, then the composition of the small role with the next largest number of payouts A stop control table in which the maximum number of frames to be drawn in a range of four frames is determined so that the symbols are aligned with the effective line is generated, and reel stop control is performed. In the second and third stop reels, if the constituent symbol of the winning combination on the already stopped reel is stopped on the effective line, the small combination is changed to the active line together with the symbols stopped on the active line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in within a range of four frames is determined so as to be aligned, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of a plurality of small roles with different payout numbers on the reel that has already stopped are both stopped on the active line, the small symbols are displayed together with the constituent symbols of the small role with the largest payout number that are stopped on the active line. If the winning combination is drawn in the range of 4 frames so that the winning combination is aligned with the effective line, and the winning combination with the largest payout number cannot be pulled into the position where it is aligned with the active line, the winning combination with the constituent figure of the winning role with the next largest paying number is displayed. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in within a range of 4 frames so as to align with the effective line is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  When multiple types of small roles (1 (1) to (4)) with the same payout number are won in the gaming state excluding CT, the first stop reel is configured with any of the selected small roles. A stop control table in which the maximum number of frames to be drawn in a range of four frames is determined so that the symbols are aligned with any one of the effective lines is generated, and reel stop control is performed. At this time, if the priority is set for the stop position, and there are multiple constituent symbols of the selected small role in the pull-in range of 4 frames, the number of frames to be pulled in that draws the stop position with the highest priority is set. A defined stop control table is created. In the second and third stop reels, if the constituent symbol of the winning combination on the already stopped reel is stopped on the active line, the small combination is aligned with the active line along with the symbols stopped on the active line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of 4 frames is defined is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of multiple types of winning roles on the reels that have already stopped are both stopped on the active line, the winning role is valid along with the constituent symbols of any of the winning roles that are stopped on that active line. A stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn into the stop positions with the highest priority among the stop positions aligned on the line is determined within a range of four frames, and the reel stop control is performed.

  When a plurality of types of replaying players having different priorities (replay (1) (2), of which replay (2) has a higher priority than replay (1)) in the gaming state excluding CT is selected In the first stop reel, the highest priority of the replaying players among the selected replaying players is drawn in as much as possible in the range of 4 frames so as to align with any active line, and the highest priority If you can't draw a high re-gamer's composition symbol to any active line in the drawing range of 4 frames, make the next highest-priority re-game player's composition symbol align to any active line A stop control table in which the maximum number of frames to be drawn in a range of 4 frames is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, in the second and third stop reels, if the constituent symbol of the re-game player selected in the already stopped reel is stopped on the active line, the re-player game is effective together with the symbols stopped on the active line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in within a range of 4 frames so as to align with the line is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of the re-gamer with different priorities are already stopped on the active line in the reels that have already stopped, the re-player combination with the highest-priority re-gamer that is stopped on the active line is displayed again. If the player is drawn in the range of 4 frames so that the gamer is aligned with the active line, and the regamer with the highest priority cannot be pulled into the position aligned with the active line, it will be displayed along with the configuration pattern of the next highest priority gamer A stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is defined in a range of 4 frames so that the re-game players are aligned with the active line is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  If the special role and small role are elected in the gaming state excluding CT (if the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or if the special role and small role are simultaneously elected), the first stop In reels, the winning special symbol is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames over any active line, and the winning special symbol is drawn in the range of 4 frames to any active line. If not, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn is maximally drawn in the range of 4 frames to the constituent lines of the selected winning combination in any valid line, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, in the second and third stop reels, if the symbol of the special combination or small combination that has been won on the already stopped reel is stopped on the active line, the special combination or A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of 4 frames is defined so that the small combination is aligned with the effective line is generated, and the reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the special symbols and the small role component symbols are both stopped on the active line in the reels that have already been stopped, the special characters are preferentially aligned with the active line together with the special symbol component symbols stopped on the active line. If the special role is not drawn to the position where the special role is aligned with the effective line, the number of drawn frames is determined within the range of 4 frames so that the small role is aligned with the effective line. The stop control table thus created is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  In the gaming state excluding CT, when multiple types of small roles with the same payout number as the special role are elected (when special roles are carried over from before the previous game and multiple types of small roles are elected) In the first stop reel, the special symbols are drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in preference to any active line, and the special symbols are drawn to any effective line in the range of 4 frames. If it is not drawn in, the number of draws to be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames is determined in priority in order of the stop position with the highest priority among the stop positions where the small role is aligned with the active line. A stop control table is created and reel stop control is performed. Also, in the second and third stop reels, if the constituent symbols of multiple types of small roles with the same special payout or payout number on the already stopped reels are stopped on the active line, the symbols stopped on the active line At the same time, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn in is determined in a range of 4 frames so that a plurality of types of small roles having the same special combination or payout number are aligned on the active line, and reel stop control is performed. In other words, if multiple types of small roles with the same number of payouts as the special role are elected, the special role is drawn first with priority over any active line, and the special role cannot be drawn into any active line. In such a case, control is performed in which the stop position with the higher priority is drawn with priority among the stop positions where the small combination is aligned with the active line.

  In the gaming state except CT, when a special combination and a re-playing role are won, the first stop reel will have a 4-game range with priority given to the constituent symbols of the winning re-playing role. If you cannot draw the constituent symbols of the selected re-playing role to any active line within the range of 4 frames, the winning special characters will be maximized to the effective line within the range of 4 frames. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in is limited is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, in the second and third stop reels, if the constituent symbols of the special combination or replay combination selected in the already stopped reel are stopped on the active line, the special combination together with the symbols stopped on the active line is displayed. Alternatively, a stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined in a range of four frames so that the re-game players are aligned with the active line is generated, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if both the special role and the re-game player's constituent symbols are stopped on the active line in the reels that have already stopped, the re-game player will be put on the active line together with the re-game player's constituent symbols that are stopped on the active line. Withdrawing in the range of 4 frames so that they are aligned, if the re-playing role is not drawn to the position where it is aligned with the active line, withdrawing in the range of 4 frames so that the special role is aligned with the active line together with the composition pattern of the special role A stop control table in which the number of frames is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, since the re-playing role is always arranged so that it can be pulled in within 4 frames, if the special role and the re-playing role are elected, the re-playing role must be on one of the active lines. Become.

  If multiple types of replaying players with different priorities from the special role are selected in the gaming state except CT, the first stop reel will use one of the replaying game components with the highest priority. If you draw the maximum number of lines into the line in the range of 4 frames, and if you do not draw the configuration figure of the highest priority re-gamer into any active line in the range of 4 frames, the next highest priority re-play If the composition symbol of the small part of the role is drawn into one of the active lines with a drawing range of 4 frames, and if the composition symbol of any re-playing role is not drawn within the drawing range of 4 frames, any of the symbols of the special role A stop control table in which the maximum number of frames to be drawn in the range of 4 frames is defined in the effective line is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, in the second and third stop reels, if the constituent symbols of the special combination or multiple types of replay combination winning in the already stopped reels are stopped on the active line, together with the symbols stopped on the active line A stop control table in which the number of draw-in frames is determined in a range of 4 frames so that the special combination or replay combination is aligned with the active line is created, and the reel stop control is performed. That is, if a re-gamer is drawn in priority with any active line in order of priority, and if any re-game player cannot be drawn into any active line, a special game is drawn into any active line. Reel stop control is performed. In addition, since the re-gamer is always arranged so that it can be pulled in within 4 frames, if there are multiple types of re-game players with different priorities from the special role, be sure to select one of them. Will be aligned to one of the active lines.

  If none of the re-game players are elected during CT, for the specific reel among the first stop reels, that is, the left reel, the constituent symbol of the small role with the largest number of payouts will be on any active line. In order to align, if the drawing pattern of the small part with the largest number of payouts cannot be drawn into any active line within the range of one frame, A stop control table in which the maximum number of frames to be drawn in a range of one frame is determined so that the constituent symbols are aligned with any one of the effective lines is generated, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, among the first stop reels other than the specific reels, that is, the middle reel and the right reel, in the range of four frames so that the constituent symbols of the small part with the largest payout number are aligned on one of the effective lines. If the constituent figure of the small role with the largest number of payouts cannot be drawn into any active line within the range of 4 frames, the constituent figure of the small role with the next largest number of payouts will be assigned to any active line. A stop control table in which the maximum number of frames to be drawn in a range of four frames is determined so as to be aligned, and reel stop control is performed.

  In the second and third stop reels, if the reel is a specific reel, if the constituent symbol of the small role is stopped on the active line in the already stopped reel, the small role is displayed together with the symbol stopped on the effective line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of one frame is determined so as to be aligned with the effective line is generated, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of a plurality of small roles with different payout numbers on the reel that has already stopped are both stopped on the active line, the small symbols are displayed together with the constituent symbols of the small role with the largest payout number that are stopped on the active line. If the winning combination is drawn in the range of one frame so that the combination is aligned with the active line, and the small combination with the largest number of payouts cannot be pulled into the position aligned with the effective line, then the small combination with the constituent figure of the next small winning combination A stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of one frame so that the winning combination is aligned with the effective line, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if it is not a specific reel, if the constituent symbol of the small role is stopped on the active line in the already stopped reel, the small role will be aligned with the active line together with the symbol stopped on the effective line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of 4 frames is defined is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of a plurality of small roles with different payout numbers on the reel that has already stopped are both stopped on the active line, the small symbols are displayed together with the constituent symbols of the small role with the largest payout number that are stopped on the active line. If the winning combination is drawn in the range of 4 frames so that the combination is aligned with the effective line, and the small combination with the largest number of payouts cannot be pulled into the position aligned with the effective line, the small combination with the constituent figure of the small winning combination with the next largest number of payouts A stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined in a range of four frames so that the winning combination is aligned with the effective line, and reel stop control is performed.

  When a re-gamer is elected during CT, for a specific reel among the first stop reels, a range of one frame is set so that the constituent symbols of the selected re-gamer are aligned with any active line. If the constituent symbols of the selected re-gamer are not drawn into any active line within the range of one frame, the constituent symbols of the small role with the largest number of payouts will be selected. If you cannot draw the symbol of the small part with the largest number of payouts to one of the active lines, the next small part with the largest number of payouts. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is drawn within the drawing range of one frame is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, for the reels other than the specific reel among the first stop reels, the winning combination of the replaying player is drawn in as much as possible in the range of 4 frames so that the composition pattern of the winning replaying player is aligned with one of the effective lines. If it is not possible to draw the composition symbol of any of the small drawings into any effective line within the range of 4 frames, the maximum size within the range of 4 frames so that the composition symbol of the small role with the largest number of payouts will be aligned with any effective line If you cannot draw the symbol of a small role with the most payouts to any effective line within the 4-frame pull-in range, the symbol of the small role with the next payout amount is within the 4-frame pull-in range. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  In the second and third stop reels, if the reel is a specific reel, if the component symbol of the re-playing winning combination or the component symbol of the small role is stopped on the active line in the already stopped reel, it stops on the active line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of one frame is determined so that either the re-playing role or the small role is aligned with the active line together with the symbol being played, and reel stop control is performed. . In addition, if both the constituent symbols of the re-gamer selected in the reel that has already stopped and the constituent symbols of the small role are stopped on the active line, the re-gamer's constituent symbols are given priority within the range of one frame on the active line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of the re-playing winning team in the reels that have already stopped do not stop on the active line, and the constituent symbols of multiple small roles with different payout numbers stop on any active line, that If you draw in the range of one frame so that the small role is aligned with the active line together with the composition pattern of the small role with the largest payout number that is stopped on the line, if the small role with the largest payout number cannot be pulled into the active line, Next, a stop control table in which the number of pull-in frames to be drawn in a range of one frame so that the small combinations are aligned with the effective line is created together with the constituent symbols of the small combinations having the largest number of payouts, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if it is not a specific reel, if the constituent symbol of the re-gamer selected in the reel that has already stopped or the constituent symbol of the small role is stopped on the active line, that symbol and the symbol stopped on the active line A stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined in a range of four frames so that either the re-game combination or the small combination is aligned with the effective line is generated, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if both the constituent symbols of the re-gamer selected in the reels that have already stopped and the constituent symbols of the small role are stopped on the active line, the re-gamer's constituent symbols are given priority in the range of four frames on the active line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, if the constituent symbols of the re-playing winning team in the reels that have already stopped do not stop on the active line, and the constituent symbols of multiple small roles with different payout numbers stop on any active line, that With the composition pattern of the small part with the largest payout number stopped on the line, the small part withdrawn in the range of 4 frames so that the small part is aligned with the active line, and the small part with the largest payout number cannot be drawn into the active line, Next, a stop control table in which the number of pull-in frames to be drawn in a range of 4 frames so that the small roles are aligned with the active line is created together with the constituent symbols of the small roles with the largest number of payouts, and reel stop control is performed.

  When multiple types of re-game players with different priorities are elected during CT, the highest priority among the re-game players elected on any active line for a specific reel among the first stop reels If you do not draw the highest recombination figure in the range of one frame, and do not pull the highest-priority recombination figure in one active line in the range of one frame The re-player combination symbol with high priority must be drawn into any active line within the range of one frame, and any re-player combination symbol must not be drawn into any active line within the range of one frame. For example, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn preferentially in the drawing range of one frame is set to one of the effective lines in the descending order of the number of payouts, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, for the reels other than the specific reel among the first stop reels, the re-playing combination with the highest priority among the re-playing combination winning in any active line is maximized in the range of 4 frames. If you do not pull in the re-game player symbol with the highest priority to any active line within the 4-frame draw range, the re-game player symbol with the next highest priority will be assigned to any active line. If you draw in the 4-frame pull-in range, and if you do not draw any of the re-playing game symbols in any active line in the 4-frame pull-in range, then the 4-frame pull-in range in any active line in order of the number of payouts A stop control table in which the number of frames to be pulled in preferentially is determined is created, and reel stop control is performed.

  In the second and third stop reels, if the reels are already stopped, if the winning symbols of the plurality of types of re-playing roles or small roles with different priorities are stopped on the active line, A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in a range of one frame is defined so that either the re-playing role or the small role is aligned with the active line along with the symbols stopped on the active line is created, and reel stop control is performed Is done. In other words, when multiple types of re-game players with different priorities are elected, the re-game players are drawn in priority to one of the active lines in the order of priority, and none of the re-game players can be withdrawn. In such a case, the small combination is drawn into one of the active lines in the order of the small combination having the largest number of payouts. In addition, if it is not a specific reel, if the constituent symbols of a plurality of types of re-playing roles or small roles with different priorities that have been won in the already stopped reel are stopped on the active line, the reel is stopped on that active line. A stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is defined in a range of four frames so that either the re-playing combination or the small combination is aligned with the active line along with the existing symbol is created, and reel stop control is performed. In other words, when multiple types of re-game players with different priorities are elected, the re-game players are drawn in priority to one of the active lines in the order of priority, and none of the re-game players can be withdrawn. In such a case, the small combination is drawn into one of the active lines in the order of the small combination having the largest number of payouts.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of small roles with different payout numbers are won in the gaming state except CT when JAC and other small roles are simultaneously elected in the regular bonus. In the first stop reel, the design symbol of JAC is drawn on the active line in preference to the constituent symbols of other small roles, and in the second and third stop reels, The stop control is performed so that the combination of JACs is aligned with the effective line where the JAC configuration symbols are stopped in the already stopped reels. In addition, in the case where the already-stopped reel has the JAC configuration symbols and other small-competition configuration symbols stopped on the active line, the JAC's configuration symbols on the already stopped reels are stopped on the active line. The stop control in which the combinations are aligned is performed in preference to the stop control in which the other small roles are aligned on the active line where the constituent symbols of the other small roles are stopped in the already stopped reels. As will be described later, since the JAC configuration symbols are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range of all reels, if JAC and other small roles are simultaneously elected in the regular bonus, be sure to Will be aligned on the effective line.

  As shown in FIG. 2, “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, at intervals of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position. That is, the winning flags of challenge bonus (2) (Bell-Replay-Replay), Replay (1) (Replay-Replay-Replay), Bell (Bell-Bell-Bell), JAC (Bell-Bell-Replay) are set respectively. When the game is performed, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player. Especially during regular bonuses, if a small role other than JAC is elected, JAC is always accompanied, and priority is given to the control that draws the combination of JACs with the largest number of payouts to the active line. When a small role is won, a JAC can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player.

  As for “Watermelon”, there is a place where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and the combination of watermelons (Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon) can be aligned. If the stop operation is not performed within the 4-frame pull-in range for the line, the watermelon combinations cannot be aligned. For this reason, at the time of winning the watermelon, if any reel is stopped at a timing other than the 4-frame pull-in range, the combination of watermelons will not be aligned on any effective line and will be missed.

  As for “Cherry”, there is a place where the left reel is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and “Cherry” is a stop operation in which the drawing range is 4 frames with respect to the effective line of the left reel. If you don't do it, you won't be able to make a cherry combination. For this reason, when winning the cherry, if the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 1-6, 13-19, 21, the combination of cherries is aligned on one of the active lines, and the other When the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at the timing, that is, the timing of the region numbers 7 to 12 and 20, the combination of cherries will not be aligned on any effective line and will be missed.

  For “Red 7”, any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, for “White 7”, 5 symbols for the reels 2L and 2C are arranged. There are locations arranged at intervals of more than the above, that is, intervals exceeding 4 frames, and in the drawing range of 4 frames for the effective line that can be combined with the combination of big bonus (1) (red 7-red 7-red 7). If the stop operation is not performed, the combination of the big bonus (1) cannot be aligned, and the drawing range of 4 frames for the effective line in which the combination of the big bonus (2) (white 7-white 7-red 7) can be aligned. If the stop operation is not performed, the combination of big bonus (2) cannot be made. For this reason, when winning the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2), if the reel is operated to stop at a timing other than the 4-frame pull-in range, the winning big bonus (1) or big bonus ( The combination of 2) is not aligned with any effective line and will be missed.

  For “Red 7”, “White 7”, and “Black BAR”, only one each is arranged on the left reel, so the combination of 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) The combination of one sheet (1), one sheet (2), and one sheet (3) cannot be aligned unless a stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of four frames with respect to the available effective lines. Therefore, at the time of winning one (1), when the left reel is stopped at the timing of the area numbers 3 to 9, the combination of one (1) is aligned on one of the active lines and won When the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at a timing other than that, i.e., at the timings of region numbers 1, 2, and 10-21, the combination of one (1) is not aligned with any effective line, Become. In addition, when winning one (2), if the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 10 to 16, the combination of one (2) is aligned on one of the active lines, and the others When the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of No. 1, that is, the timings of the region numbers 1 to 9 and 17 to 21, the combination of one (2) will not be aligned on any effective line and will be missed. . In addition, when one (3) is won and the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 1, 2, and 18-21, the combination of one (3) is aligned to one of the active lines and won. However, when the operation of stopping the left reel is performed at other timings, that is, the timings of the region numbers 3 to 16, the combination of one (3) is not aligned with any of the effective lines and will be missed. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the display mode (region numbers 1 to 3 and 3 to 5) in which the “red 7” symbol stops on the effective line (either upper or lower) of the left reel and the “white 7” symbol Display mode (area number 8-10, 10-12) that stops at the left reel effective line (either upper or lower) and the “black BAR” symbol is the left reel effective line (either upper or lower) The display modes (region numbers 15 to 17 and 17 to 19) that are stopped at the same time are arranged in excess of the four frames that are the maximum pull-in range.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 3 to 9) at which a maximum of 4 frames of the “red 7” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any effective line, “white 7” is displayed. It is possible to draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “Black” and “Black BAR” symbols and stop them on any effective line, or to draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “White 7” symbol and stop them on any effective line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 10 to 16), the “red 7” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol can be drawn on a maximum of four frames and stopped on any of the effective lines. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 9, 17 to 21) where a maximum of 4 frames of the “black BAR” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any effective line, "Design and" white 7 "design Also be stopped in any effective line on the draw large four-frame, so as not be. That is, the “White 7” symbol and the “Black BAR” symbol do not stop on the active line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn onto the active line. The “Red 7” symbol and the “Black BAR” symbol do not stop on the active line regardless of the timing at which the “7” symbol can be drawn onto the active line. The “Red 7” symbol and the “Red 7” symbol and the “White 7” symbol do not stop on the active line no matter what timing the stop operation is performed on the winning line. Since the “white 7” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol are arranged, there is no stop operation position where the “red 7” symbol, the “white 7” symbol, and the “black BAR” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  As for “Orange”, there are locations on the reel 2L that are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, a combination of challenge bonus (1) (orange-replay-bell), replay (2) A stop operation is performed in which “orange” that constitutes a combination (orange-bell-bell) and one (4) combination (orange-bell-replay) is within the pull-in range of 4 frames with respect to the effective line of the left reel. Otherwise, the combination of challenge bonus (1), the combination of replay (2), and the combination of one (4) cannot be prepared. For this reason, when the Challenge Bonus (1), Replay (2), and 1 (4) are won, the Big is selected if the left reel is stopped at a timing when “Orange” is out of the 4-frame pull-in range. The combination of bonus (1) or big bonus (2) will not be aligned on any active line and will be missed.

  When replay (2) wins, replay (1) is always won, so even if replay (2) is missed, replay (1) will always win. In addition, when one (4) is won, it is always accompanied by one (1) to (3), so even if one (4) is missed, one (1) to (3) The red reel, “white 7” and “black BAR”, which constitute one (1) to (3) combination with respect to the effective line where the combination of the left and right lines is within the 4-frame pull-in range, If the stop operation is performed, one of the sheets (1) to (3) will win.

  Next, details of the reel control table applied to the left reel in a state in which all reels are still changing in the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (3), will be described based on FIGS.

  18 and 19 show that in the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (3), the result of the internal lottery is lost (when no part is won), 1 (1), 1 (2) 1 (3), Replay (1) + Replay (2), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Challenge Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 ( 3) A diagram showing a reel control table applied to the left reel in a state where all the reels are still fluctuating when +1 (4).

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the result of the internal lottery is lost, the stop positions are area numbers 3, 7, 10, 11, 16, 17, 20 and 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet When the position is any of (3), the stop position is the area number 3, 5, 10, 12, 17, 19 and when Replay (1) + Replay (2), the stop position is the area number 1, 4, 7 9, 12, 14, 19, 20, and when 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), the stop position is the area number 1, 5, 10, 14, 19 Become.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when the result of the internal lottery is a big bonus (1), the stop positions are area numbers 1, 3, 5, 10, 12, 14, and 19, and when the result is a big bonus (2), the stop position Is the region number 1, 5, 10, 12, 14, 19 and the challenge bonus (1), the stop position is the region number 1, 5, 10, 12, 14, 19, 20 and the big bonus (1) +1 Stop at the time of (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) or Big Bonus (2) +1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) The positions are region numbers 3, 5, 10, 12, 17, 19, and 20.

  In this embodiment, when replay (1) + replay (2) is won, as shown in FIG. 18, “orange” constituting replay (2) is drawn in the upper frame or the lower frame in the pull-in range of 4 frames. The number of frames to draw “orange” into the upper or lower row is set at the stop operation position that can be pulled in, and “orange” is pulled into the upper row at the stop operation position where “orange” can be pulled into both the upper or lower row. The number of frames to be drawn in is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when replay (1) + replay (2) is won, and “orange” is stopped at the stop operation position where the upper or lower part can be drawn in the pull-in range of 4 frames, Control to stop "Orange" in the upper or lower stage, and control to stop "Orange" in the upper stage when stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where "Orange" can be pulled into both the upper and lower stages. To do. In addition, since “Cherry” is located under one pattern of “Orange”, “Orange” stops at the upper stage, and when the combination of replay (2) is aligned on the active line, “Cherry-any” is displayed on the virtual pay line Lv. -Any "combination will be prepared. If “orange” cannot be pulled into either the upper stage or the lower stage, control is performed to stop “replay” constituting the replay (1) at either the upper stage or the lower stage.

  Also, if 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) is won in a state where no special role is won, as shown in FIG. 4) The “orange” that constitutes 4) pulls in the upper frame with a 4-frame pull-in range. The number of frames that “orange” is pulled in is set at the upper stop position. In the operation position, “orange” is not stopped at the lower stage, “white 7” constituting one sheet (2) is drawn to the lower stage, or “orange” is not stopped at the lower stage, and one sheet (3 ), The number of frames to be drawn is determined. For this reason, in the present embodiment, 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) is won in a state where no special role is won, and “orange” is 4 in the upper row. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the frame can be pulled in, the control to stop the “orange” in the upper stage and the “orange” in the lower stage can be performed, but the upper stage is pulled in. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where it cannot be performed, “orange” is not stopped at the lower stage, but “white 7” constituting one sheet (2) is stopped at the lower stage or one sheet (3 The “black BAR” that constitutes () is stopped at the upper stage. In addition, as described above, “cherry” is positioned below one pattern of “orange”, so that “orange” stops in the upper stage and the virtual winning line Lv is obtained when one (4) combination is aligned on the active line. The combination of “cherry-any-any” will be complete.

  On the other hand, when 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) is won in the state where the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, FIG. As shown, a stop operation position where “orange” constituting one frame (4) can be drawn in the lower frame within the pull-in range of four frames (however, “red 7” constituting big bonus (1) can also be drawn into the upper or lower row. (Except for the stop operation position), the number of frames to draw “orange” into the lower row is determined, and at the stop operation position where “orange” can be pulled into the upper row, the number of draw-in frames that does not stop “orange” into the upper row Are defined respectively. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn in the pull-in range of 4 frames in the lower row, It is possible to perform control to stop “Orange” to the lower stage and pull “Orange” to the upper stage, but if a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where it cannot be pulled to the lower stage, “Orange” The upper stage is controlled so as not to stop. Further, when “orange” stops at the lower stage and one (4) combination is arranged on the active line, the combination of “cherry-any-any” is not arranged on the virtual pay line Lv.

  Also, when the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won alone, as shown in FIG. 19, "orange" is a part of the stop operation position that can be drawn in the upper four-drawing range. In some stop operation positions, the number of frames for drawing “orange” to the upper stage is determined. For this reason, in this embodiment, one special (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) is won in a state where no special role is won, and a big bonus (1) or a big bonus is won. When (2) wins alone and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the number of frames to draw “orange” into the upper row is determined, control is performed to stop “orange” into the upper row. ing. In addition, as described above, “cherry” is positioned under one pattern of “orange”, so when “orange” stops in the upper stage, the combination of “cherry-any-any” is aligned on the virtual pay line Lv. It becomes.

  When the challenge bonus (1) is won by itself, as shown in FIG. 19, the “orange” that constitutes the challenge bonus (1) can be withdrawn in the upper or lower stage within the 4-frame pull-in range. The number of frames to draw “orange” into the upper or lower row is determined, and the stop operation position where “orange” can be pulled into both the upper or lower row has the number of frames to draw “orange” into the upper row. It has been established. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the challenge bonus (1) is won and “Orange” is stopped at the stop operation position where the upper frame or the lower frame can be drawn in the pull-in range of 4 frames, “Orange” is displayed. In addition to performing control to stop the upper stage or the lower stage, if the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “orange” can be pulled into both the upper stage and the lower stage, control is performed to stop “orange” in the upper stage. ing. Further, as described above, since “cherry” is positioned below one pattern of “orange”, when “orange” stops at the upper stage and the combination of challenge bonus (1) is aligned on the active line, virtual winning line Lv The combination of “cherry-any-any” will be complete.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when Replay (2) wins, when one (4) wins without any special role being won, Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) is awarded. When a challenge bonus (1) has been won when the game is missed, the “Cherry-any-any” combination is arranged on the virtual pay line Lv. Further, when one (4) wins in a state where the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, the combination of “cherry-any-any” is not arranged on the virtual pay line Lv. ing.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described.

  In this embodiment, the chance is that when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and the selected bonus is missed, or 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) is won. In addition, in this embodiment, “red 7” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel, and can be derived when the selected one (1), one (2), and one (3) is missed. If either “White 7” or “Black BAR” stops and no combination is on the active line, this is a chance.

  The reach of the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus (1)) is won in the normal gaming state. If “cherry” stops in the middle of the reel and no combination is on the active line, that is, the combination of “cherry-any-any” is aligned with the virtual winning line Lv, and both combinations are active lines If you don't get it, you'll reach a reach. Also, if “cherry” does not stop in the middle of the left reel and one (4) is aligned with the active line, that is, the combination of “cherry-any-any” does not align with the virtual pay line Lv. The reach is also reached when one (4) is aligned with the active line.

  Here, an example of the reel stop control when deriving the chance and reach will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, one (1), one (2), one (3) is won in a state where no special role is carried over. Or when the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus (1) is won, the region numbers 5, 12, 19 are "red 7", "white" 7 ”or“ Black BAR ”is set to the stop position where the stop position is set, but if no combination is won, the area numbers other than 5, 12, 19 The number of frames to be drawn where the symbol is the stop position is determined.

  When any one of (1) to (3) is elected in a state where no special combination is carried over, the region numbers 5, 12, and 19 are the stop positions. If the symbols that make up the winning combination at that time are not stopped on the active line, none of the roles are aligned on the active line, and a chance is established.

  In addition, when any of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus is won, the region numbers 5, 12, and 19 are the stop positions. If the symbol that makes up the winning combination at that time does not stop on the active line, or if the symbols that make up the winning combination on the remaining reels cannot be stopped on the active line, then Will not be complete, and the chance will be established.

  On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, none of the area numbers 5, 12, and 19 will be at the stop position, and no chance will be established.

  In this embodiment, as described above, a combination of “red 7” that constitutes a combination of one sheet (1), “white 7” that constitutes a combination of one sheet (2), and one sheet (3). There is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim for “Black BAR” that makes up the game, and it is impossible to play a game without losing one (1) to (3), and a chance chance appears You can't do it.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, replay (1) + replay (2), 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4), big bonus (1) When the big bonus (2) and the challenge bonus (1) are won, the area numbers 1 and 14, that is, the number of pull-in frames where “cherry” stops in the middle of the left reel is determined. Replay (1) + replay (2), 1 (1) + 1 (2) + 1 (3) + 1 (4) won with no special role selected, and area number 1 , 14 when the stop position is reached, the replay (2) or one (4) is always aligned with the effective line, so the reach eye is not established, whereas the big bonus (1), Big Bonus (2) won and Area No. 1, 1 If any of became the stop position, without being aligned with any of the role in the effective line, so that the reach box is established. If the challenge bonus (1) is won and one of the area numbers 1 and 14 is at the stop position, the challenge bonus (1) is always aligned with the active line, and the reach is not established.

  Also, if no winning combination is won, “Cherry” does not stop in the middle of the left reel, and of course, no reach will be established in such a case.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, 1 (1) +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) is won in a state where no special role is won. When “Orange” stops, “Orange” stops at the bottom and one (4) does not win along with the active line. “Orange” stops at the top and always (1) (4) aligns with the active line. In order to win a prize, a combination of “cherry-any-any” is always aligned with the virtual winning line Lv, while one (1) with a big bonus (1) or a big bonus (2) selected. ) When +1 (2) +1 (3) +1 (4) is elected, “Orange” will stop at the top and 1 (4) will not be aligned on the active line and won “Orange” Will stop at the bottom and 1 (4) will be on the active line to win , Will be aligned in a single combination of "cherry -any-any" is not aligned to a virtual winning line Lv (4) is valid line, so that the reach box is established.

  Next, details of the reel control table applied to the left reel in a state where all the reels are still changing in CT will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 20 shows that in CT, when the result of internal lottery is other than replay (1) or replay (1) + replay (2), when the result of internal lottery is replay (1), the result of internal lottery is replay (1). ) + Replay (2) is a diagram showing a reel control table applied to the left reel in a state where all the reels are still fluctuating.

  When the result of the internal lottery in CT is other than replay (1) or replay (1) + replay (2), as shown in FIG. The stop operation position where the “bell” that constitutes the upper part or the lower part can be retracted within the pull-in range of one frame has a fixed number of pull-in frames that pulls the “bell” into the upper or lower part. For the stop operation position that cannot be pulled up to the upper or lower level in the range, the symbols that make up the small part (the watermelon in area numbers 5 and 6 and the cherry in area number 13) with the next largest number of payouts among the symbols that can be pulled in. The number of frames to be drawn into the upper or lower stage is determined.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, in the case where the result of the internal lottery is other than replay (1) or replay (1) + replay (2) in CT, the “bell” is the upper stage or the lower stage when all reels are rotating. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that can be retracted in the single frame pull-in range, the “bell” is controlled to stop at the upper or lower level, and the “bell” is moved to the upper or lower level in the single frame pull-in range. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be retracted, control is performed to stop the “cherry” or “watermelon” in the upper or lower stage. If the “bell” is stopped at the upper or lower stage when the left reel is stopped, the remaining reels will also have the symbols that make up the JAC on the effective line where the “bell” is stopped on the left reel. Control to pull in and stop is performed. In addition, if the “watermelon” is stopped at the upper or lower stage when the left reel is stopped, the remaining reels will also receive 4 frames of the symbols that make up the watermelon on the effective line where the “watermelon” has stopped at the left reel. Control is performed to pull in and stop within the range.

  When the result of internal lottery in CT is replay (1), as shown in FIG. 20, “replay” constituting replay (1) can be drawn in a range of one frame in the upper stage or the lower stage. In the stop operation position where “Cherry” does not stop at the upper or lower stage, the number of frames to be drawn into which “Replay” is pulled into the upper or lower stage is determined, and “Replay” cannot be pulled into the upper or lower stage within the pull-in range of one frame. The operating position or “Replay” can be pulled up to the upper or lower level within the drawing range of one frame, but at that time the “Cherry” stops at the upper level or the lower level at the same time, and is a target for winning during CT. If the “bell” that makes up the JAC with the largest number of payouts among the small roles is a stop operation position that can be retracted in the upper or lower stage with a single frame pull-in range, the “bell” is Or, if the number of frames to be drawn down is set, and the stop operation position does not allow the "bell" to be drawn up or down in the drawing range of one frame, the next number of payouts is shown in the drawable symbols The number of frames to be drawn into which symbols constituting a large small combination (cherry in area number 13) are drawn up or down is determined.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the replay (1) is won in CT, and the “replay” that constitutes the replay (1) in a state where all the reels are rotating can be drawn in a range of one frame in the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position at which “cherry” does not stop at the upper or lower stage at the same time, control for stopping “replay” at the upper or lower stage is performed. Stop operation position (area number 6) where “Replay” cannot be pulled up or down in the pull-in range of one frame, or “Replay” can be pulled up or down in the pull-in range of one frame. If a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3, 13 to 16, 21) where the “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage, the “bell” is pulled in the upper or lower stage with a single frame pull-in range. If the stop operation position (area number 1 to 3, 6, 14 to 16, 21) can be inserted, control is performed to stop the “bell” at the upper or lower level, and the “bell” is pulled into the upper or lower level by one frame. If it is a stop operation position (region number 13) that cannot be retracted within the range, control is performed to stop the “cherry” at the upper or lower level. When the left reel is stopped, “Replay” is stopped at the upper or lower stage, and if the cherry is not stopped at the upper or lower stage, the remaining reels are also replayed to the active line where “Replay” is stopped on the left reel ( The control which pulls in the symbol which comprises 1) within the drawing range of 4 frames, and stops is performed. In addition, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” is stopped at the upper or lower stage, and if “replay” is not stopped at the upper or lower stage, the “bell” is also stopped at the left reel of the remaining reels. Control is performed so that the symbols constituting the JAC are drawn into the effective line within the drawing range of 4 frames and stopped.

  When the result of internal lottery in CT is replay (1) + replay (2), as shown in FIG. 20, the “orange” that constitutes replay (2) can be pulled in the upper or lower stage within the range of one frame. The number of frames to draw “orange” into the upper or lower row is defined for the position, and replay (1) is configured among the stop operation positions where “orange” cannot be pulled into the upper or lower row within the draw range of one frame. “Replay” can be drawn in the upper or lower range of one frame, but at the same time the “Cherry” does not stop at the upper or lower level, the number of frames that will be drawn into the upper or lower level at the stop operation position. The stop operation position where “Replay” cannot be pulled in the upper or lower part within the pull-in range of one frame, or “Replay” is the upper line in the pull-in range of one frame. In the stop operation position where “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage at the same time, the JAC with the largest number of payouts among the small roles to be awarded during CT is formed. The number of frames to be drawn into the upper or lower level is determined.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, replay (1) + replay (2) is won in CT, and “orange” constituting replay (2) with all reels rotating is one frame at the top or bottom. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1, 2, 12-15, 20, 21) that can be pulled in within the range, control is performed to stop “orange” in the upper or lower stage. Of the stop operation positions where “orange” cannot be pulled in to the upper or lower level within the range of one frame, “replay” that constitutes replay (1) can be pulled in the upper or lower level within the range of one frame. At the same time, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “cherry” does not stop at the upper or lower stage, control is performed to stop “replay” at the upper or lower stage. Stop operation position (area number 6) where “Replay” cannot be pulled up or down in the pull-in range of one frame, or “Replay” can be pulled up or down in the pull-in range of one frame. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 3 and 16) where the “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage, control is performed to stop the “bell” at the upper or lower stage. If “orange” is stopped at the upper or lower level when the left reel is stopped, the remaining reels will also have 4 frames of the symbols that make up the replay (2) on the active line where “orange” has stopped on the left reel. Control is performed to pull in and stop in the pull-in range. In addition, when the left reel is stopped, “Replay” stops at the upper or lower stage, and if the cherry is not stopped at the upper or lower stage, the remaining reels also enter the effective line where “Replay” has stopped at the left reel. Control is performed to draw and stop the symbols constituting the replay (1) within the drawing range of 4 frames. In addition, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” is stopped at the upper or lower stage, and if “replay” is not stopped at the upper or lower stage, the “bell” is also stopped at the left reel of the remaining reels. Control is performed so that the symbols constituting the JAC are drawn into the effective line within the drawing range of 4 frames and stopped.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when replay (1) is won in CT, the left reel is set to the first stop, and the stop operation position (region number 6) in which replay (1) cannot be withdrawn within the pull-in range of one frame. , Or “Replay” can be pulled up to the upper or lower stage within the pull-in range of one frame, but at that time, “Cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage at the same time (area numbers 1 to 3, 13 to 16, 21) By performing the stop operation at, it becomes possible to win the small role without winning the replay (1). In particular, the number of payouts is the largest in CT by performing a stop operation at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3, 6, 14 to 16 and 21) where the “bell” can be pulled into the upper stage or the lower stage within one frame drawing range. JAC can be awarded. When the first reel other than the left reel is set as the first stop, when the left reel is stopped, the winning line where the combination of replay (1) is aligned is limited, and the stop operation position where the combination of replay (1) is not aligned is Although the number of stop operation positions where JAC combinations are aligned is limited, the difficulty level is lower when the left reel is set to the first stop.

  In addition, when Replay (1) + Replay (2) is won in CT, the left reel is set to the first stop, and the “orange” is a stop operation position (region number 1) that can be pulled in the range of one frame at the upper or lower level. 2, 12-15, 20, 21), it becomes possible to win the replay (2), and the “orange” is at a stop operation position where the “orange” cannot be drawn in the upper or lower range within one frame. There is a stop operation position (region number 6) where replay (1) cannot be withdrawn within a single frame pull-in range, or “orange” is a stop operation position at which upper frame or lower row cannot be pulled in within a single frame range, and “Replay” can be pulled up or down within the pull-in range of one frame, but at that time, “Cherry” stops at the stop operation position (area number 3, 16) where it stops at the top or bottom. By performing, it is possible to win the JAC without winning the replay (1) (2).

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the CPU 41a continues the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the big bonus (2), the lottery probability of the special role (only when the special role is not carried over) and the small role is the same as the normal gaming state, and the winning probability of the replay (1) is also Although it is the same as the normal gaming state, the winning probability of replay (1) + replay (2) is higher than the normal gaming state, and the expected increase / decrease rate of medals per game (the winning probability of the target role × The replay time (1) (RT (1)) is controlled so that the total number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) is 1 or less. While the gaming state is at RT (1), the flag during RT (1) is set in the RAM 41c.

  In addition, after the end of the big bonus (1), the lottery probabilities for special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles are the same as in the normal gaming state, and the winning probabilities for replay (1) are also in the normal gaming state. However, the winning probability of replay (1) + replay (2) is higher than the normal gaming state and RT (1), and the expected increase / decrease rate of medals per game (winning of the target role) Control is made to the replay time (2) (RT (2)) where the probability x the total value of the number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) is 1 or less. While the gaming state is at RT (2), the flag during RT (2) is set in the RAM 41c.

  RT (1), RT (2) reaches the specified number of games (30 games in this embodiment) without winning the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2), or reaches the specified number of games. It ends by winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) before reaching. If the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won during RT (1) or RT (2), the specified number of games will be reached or the big bonus (1) or big won Until the bonus (2) is won, RT (1) and RT (2) will not end.

  Also, even if the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) wins during RT (1) or RT (2) and shifts to the challenge bonus, RT (1) and RT (2) will not end. , Continue until reaching the specified number of games, while RT (1), RT (2) continues, even during the challenge bonus, with the control of RT (1), RT (2), The lottery of replay (1) + replay (2) will be performed with a higher winning probability than the gaming state. When the specified number of games is reached during the challenge bonus, RT (1) and RT (2) are terminated, and the winning probability of replay (1) + replay (2) is the replay in the normal gaming state (1) + Replay (2) win probability.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replay (2) wins in the normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2) (when the replay (2) is aligned on any active line), the special role (Only when the special role has not been carried over) However, the probability of replay (1) is higher than that of the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), and the expected rate of increase / decrease of medals per game. The replay time (3) (RT (3)) in which (the winning probability of the target combination × the total number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1 is controlled. While the gaming state is at RT (3), the flag during RT (3) is set in the RAM 41c. RT (3) reaches the specified number of games (500 games in this embodiment) without winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), or before reaching the specified number of games. It ends by winning a bonus (1) or a big bonus (2). If the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won during RT (3), the number of games will be reached or the won big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) will be received. RT (3) does not end until winning.

  If the replay (2) wins during RT (3), the specified number of games will be counted from that time, and the big game (1) or big bonus (2) will not be won from that time and the specified game will be won. The game is ended by winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) before reaching the number or reaching the prescribed number of games. If the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won during RT (3), the number of games will not be counted from that point even if Replay (2) is won. If the number of games digested since the last replay (2) wins before the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won, the RT (3) will end. .

  Also, even if the challenge bonus (1) or challenge bonus (2) is won during RT (3) and the game shifts to the challenge bonus, RT (3) will not end and will continue until the specified number of games is reached. While RT (3) continues, replay (1), replay (1) + replay (1) with a higher winning probability than the normal gaming state is accompanied by control of RT (3) even during the challenge bonus. The lottery of 2) will be performed. When the specified number of games is reached during the challenge bonus, RT (3) ends and the winning probability of replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2) is replay in the normal gaming state (1) The winning probability is replay (1) + replay (2).

  In this embodiment, the expected increase rate of medals per game in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) is less than 1, that is, the number of medals decreases, whereas one game in RT (3) Since the expected increase / decrease rate of per medal exceeds 1, the number of medals will increase.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if controlled by RT (1) (2), an increase in medals cannot be expected, but the winning probability of replay (2) (replay (1) + replay (2)) is the normal gaming state. Therefore, the probability of shifting to RT (3) where an increase in medals can be expected is higher than in the normal gaming state. That is, RT (1) (2) functions as a chance zone having a higher probability of transitioning to RT (3) than in the normal gaming state.

  In RT (1) (2), the winning probability of Replay (2) (Replay (1) + Replay (2)) is higher than in the normal gaming state, but the transition is made after the end of Big Bonus (1). The winning probability of the replay (2) (replay (1) + replay (2)) is set higher for the RT (2) to be performed than for the RT (1) to be transferred after the end of the big bonus (2). For this reason, RT (2) which shifts after the end of the big bonus (1) has a higher rate of transition to RT (3) than RT (1) which shifts after the end of the big bonus (2).

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  Important work items such as various display devices, LED display data, I / O port 41d input / output data, game time counter, etc. are stored at the end of the big bonus and challenge bonus. Work. General work stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus and challenge bonus, such as stop control table, stop symbol, number of medals paid out, total number of medals paid out in big bonus, total number of medals paid out in challenge bonus, etc. Work. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, before starting the setting (before shifting to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus and challenge bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, at the end of one game When the four initialization conditions are established, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the use of the storage area of the RAM 41c is used. All areas except the middle stack area (including unused areas and unused stack areas) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus and the challenge bonus. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 is used for setting an RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is being performed, a BB signal indicating that the big bonus is being performed, a CT signal indicating that the CT is being performed, a CB signal indicating that the challenge bonus is being performed, and the number of bets. Output control is performed to output a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals and a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals paid out as a result of winning a prize as an external output signal. The game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via an external output board (not shown), and the external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41a is output to the external equipment connected to the external output board. It has come to be.

  When a big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting a BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON), the transition is repeated to the regular bonus until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, once the regular bonus ends and the next regular bonus starts, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to end (from ON to OFF). ), The output is started again when the output waiting time (tw) elapses (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  When a challenge bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting a CB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the challenge bonus of starting the output of the CT signal with the occurrence of CT (from OFF to ON state), since the transition to CT is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, the state is always controlled by CT. However, when the CT ends once and the next CT starts, the CPU 41a stops the output of the in-CT signal indicating the occurrence of the CT to be ended (from the ON state to the OFF state), and the output waiting time ( When tw) elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the challenge bonus is established, and CT ends accordingly, the output of the CT signal is stopped (from ON to OFF), and then the output of the CB signal is also stopped (from ON). OFF state).

  In this way, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, or when the CT ends and the CT starts again during the challenge bonus, the output of the RB signal or CT signal is output. After stopping for the waiting time (tw), output is started again, and it is possible to determine that the regular bonus or CT has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received the RB signal or CT signal. It becomes possible. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the level at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command can specify the game state of the next game (whether it is a normal game state, RT, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) and the number of remaining RT games. A command that is sent at the end of the game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs various effects based on the commands sent from the CPU 41a of the game control board 40 in this way. In order to perform an effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 includes a continuous counter indicating the number of remaining games of the continuous effect, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning Based on the command, the winning status of each combination, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the information indicating the presence or absence of winning, applied in the game running on the game control board 40 side An area for storing the game state to be stored (two times for the winning status and the game state) is also provided in the RAM 91c.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92, the normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT Over the course of multiple games, a chance was established in (2), no winnings occurred during RT (3), or the remaining number of games in RT (3) was three There is a continuous production performed. After the end of the continuous effect, there is a jackpot effect or a lose effect that is executed based on whether the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won.

  In addition, there are bonus effects that are executed when the gaming state is a big bonus or a challenge bonus. Further, there are a bonus winning effect that is executed when a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a challenge bonus is won, and a bonus end effect that is executed when the big bonus ends. In addition, there are a chance zone effect and an effect during RT which are executed when the gaming state is RT (1) (2) or RT (3), respectively. Execution modes of these effects vary depending on the effect mode.

  Here, of the bonus winning effects, the bonus winning effect that is executed when the challenge bonus (1) is won is started when winning the bi-challenge bonus (1) (that is, when all reels are stopped), It ends when you have set a bet for the game. Further, the bonus winning effect executed when winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is when the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won (that is, when all reels are stopped). Is started within the range until the production waiting time (the setting of the bet number is prohibited during this period) elapses. In addition, the bonus end effect is ended within a range from the end of the big bonus until the effect wait time (setting of the number of bets is prohibited during this period). In any case, since the bet number is set for the next game or is finished before that, the game is finished before the game is started. The jackpot or lose effect is started when the number of bets is set for the game after performing the continuous effects for three games, but ends when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started. Be made.

  On the other hand, continuous production, bonus production, chance zone production, or RT production is continuously executed across multiple game periods, so all reels stop during the actual execution period. Next, it is continuously executed including the period until the next game where the start switch 7 is operated is started.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the operation of the player's selection switch 56 and determination switch 57. . In the history display effect, not only the game history is simply displayed as information, but the CPU 91a further performs the operation for the progress of the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L, 2C and 2R except for the case where the game is from the start to the stop of the game), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  The continuous production is a normal game state, a game next to a game in which an opportunity is established in RT (1) or RT (2), a game next to a game in which no winning is generated during RT (3), or The game is started in the game next to the game in which the remaining number of games of RT (3) is 3, and is continuously performed over a period of 3 games. However, if a bonus is won before the end of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is forcibly terminated at that time. In particular, there is a continuous performance starting from the next game after the game that did not receive any winnings during RT (3) or the game with the remaining number of games in RT (3) being three games. During the period, the game state is controlled to RT (3), and replay (1) is won with a fairly high probability (replay (1) wins without missing), so that a bonus is won during continuous production. There are few.

  The continuous effect is performed according to the effect pattern selected according to whether or not the effect mode and the bonus are won at the start of the game where the continuous effect starts.

  In the production between the individual games in the continuous production, information that can definitely determine whether or not the bonus has been won is not notified. In the jackpot effect or the loss effect after the three games of the continuous effect are finished, information that clearly indicates whether or not the bonus is won is notified.

  The bonus effect includes a bonus effect during the big bonus and a bonus effect during the challenge bonus. In particular, in the bonus medium effect during the big bonus, as shown in FIG. 21, a belt-like image drawn “BONUS GAME” is displayed across the middle area of each reel. During the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. In the regular bonus, the valid winning lines are limited to L1 and L2, that is, the winning line straddling the upper area of each reel and the winning line straddling the lower area. Since the symbols stopped in the middle area are not subject to winning determination, a band-shaped image is displayed across the middle area of each reel, making it easy to recognize the winning line that is valid during the regular bonus, During the regular bonus, the effect of displaying an image using the area on the front of the reel that is not the target of the prize determination is performed, so that an effect with an impact can be realized and the visual recognition of the symbol subject to the prize determination is hindered. There is no such thing.

  The bonus winning effect is executed when the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus (1) is won, and as described above when the betting amount is set for the next game in which these winnings are generated. Production during bonus starts. On the other hand, when the challenge bonus (2) wins, the bonus winning effect is not executed, and when the bet number is set for the next game where the challenge bonus (2) wins, the bonus medium effect is started. The That is, when the challenge bonus (2) is won, the bonus medium effect is directly executed by setting the number of bets for the game where the challenge bonus starts without accompanying the bonus winning effect.

  The chance zone effect is started after the end of the big bonus, that is, when a bet amount is set for a game in which RT (1) or RT (2) starts, and replay (2) wins and RT (3 ), The big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, or the game ends when RT (1) or RT (2) ends when the specified number of games is reached.

  The production during RT is started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game won by Replay (2), that is, the game started by RT (3), and either Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus It ends when (2) wins or when the specified number of games is reached and RT (3) ends.

  These effects are controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and is output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display an effect image by such control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM 142 as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each effect mode, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the effect mode at that time. It will be a thing. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM 142 in advance.

  Continuous production (losing) 1-m, continuous production (big hit) 1-n, jackpot production, loss production, big bonus production, challenge bonus production, big bonus prize production, challenge bonus prize production, big bonus end production Data is prepared for each effect mode of mode 1 and mode 2 and stored in CGROM 142. Further, demonstration effect production data and history display production effect data are prepared and stored in the CGROM 142.

  Here, production data of continuous production (losing) 1 to m is prepared for each pattern selected in a state where none of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the challenge bonus (2) is won. It is the production data of the continuous production. The production data of the continuous production (big hit) 1 to n is prepared for each pattern selected in the state of winning either the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus (2). It is production data of continuous production.

  The production data of continuous production (losing) 1 to m and the production data of continuous production (big hit) 1 to n are productions that are continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games, and therefore have a relatively large amount of data. It has become. The effect data for the effect during the big bonus and the effect during the challenge bonus are effects that are continuously executed over a period of a plurality of games, and therefore the data amount is relatively large.

  However, since the liquid crystal display 51 is also provided over the transmission area on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, depending on the state of the image displayed in the transmission area, the liquid crystal display 51 is drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The visibility of the displayed symbols may be impaired, and the progress of the game may be affected. In view of this, until the rotation of all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R after the start switch 7 is operated, at least the winning determination area to be determined for winning among the transparent areas is not displayed (that is, the transparent area (winning determination area). ), The RGB value of each pixel is set to (31, 31, 31) to be in a completely transmissive state).

  When all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating, the liquid crystal display 51 starts to produce effects, but each pixel in the transmission area (winning determination area) has higher transparency than the image that is originally displayed ( That is, even if the RGB value is controlled to a semi-transparent state (close to (31, 31, 31)) and an image is displayed in a region including the transmissive region (winning determination region), the back surface of the transmissive region (winning determination region) The symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are visible. However, when a small role wins according to the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and medals are paid out in accordance with this, in order to ensure that the winning combination can be confirmed during the payout of medals. The transparent area (winning determination area) remains hidden, and the image of the transparent area (winning determination area) is controlled to be in a semi-transparent state after the medal payout is completed.

  The image data of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is developed in the frame buffer memory 156 (for writing) in each frame period. When the image data is written in the frame buffer memory 156, the image of the object on the front side is displayed. The Z buffer method is used so that data remains. In the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to all the stops of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (however, when the medals are paid out until the payout is completed), the forefront of the position corresponding to the transparent area (winning determination area) A transparent area object is set in

  The transparent region object is a completely transparent object having RGB values (31, 31, 31), and the processing of writing image data to the frame buffer memory 156 is performed with the highest priority in each frame period. ing. When the image data of the transparent area object is written, the Z value written in the Z buffer corresponding to the transparent area (winning determination area) becomes the minimum value indicating the foreground value. Image data of an image or a still image is not written in a portion corresponding to the transmission area (winning determination area).

  In addition, as a method for setting the transmissive area (winning determination area) to the semi-transmissive state, there are two methods of white addition processing and semi-transparent processing, and either of them can be applied. Whether to perform white addition processing or semi-transparency processing depending on the type of effect data and the state of the image that is displayed together with the area other than the original transmission area (winning determination area) Also good. Here, it is assumed that the RGB value in the original image data is (Rs, Gs, Bs), and the RGB value in the image data after the process of making the translucent state is represented by (Rd, Gd, Bd).

  When white addition processing is performed, the RGB values in the image data of the transmissive area (winning determination area) are calculated as follows.

  Rd = Rs + 16 (if Rd> 31 then Rd = 31)

  Gd = Gs + 16 (if Gd> 31 then Gd = 31)

  Bd = Bs + 16 (if Bd> 31 then Bd = 31)

  When translucent processing is performed, the RGB values in the image data of the transmissive area (winning determination area) are calculated as follows (where α is an α value representing translucency).

  Rd = 16 * α + Rs * (1−α)

  Gd = 16 * α + Gs * (1−α)

  Bd = 16 * α + Bs * (1−α)

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. FIG. 22A shows an example in which the transmissive area (winning determination area) corresponding to the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is not hidden or semi-transmissive. Demonstration effects and history display effects are performed in this state, but as shown in the figure, an image displayed in the transmissive area (winning determination area) (particularly when a dark image with low transparency is displayed) Depending on the situation, the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the back of the transmission area (winning determination area) become almost invisible.

  FIG. 22B shows an example in which the transparent area (winning determination area) on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is not displayed. From the operation of the start switch 7 until the reels 2L, 2C and 2R stop rotating and the display result is derived on the variable display device 2 (when the payout of medals is completed, the effect is performed). In this case, the image is displayed in this state. Here, as shown in the figure, the pattern drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back of the transparent area (winning determination area) is completely displayed without displaying an image in the transparent area (winning determination area). It will be permeated and seen by the player.

  FIG. 22C shows an example in which the transmission area (winning determination area) on the front side of the transmission areas 3L, 3C, and 3R is made semi-transparent. After all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating and the display result is derived on the variable display device 2 (however, after the payout is completed when the payout of medals has been completed), the start switch 7 is turned on in the next game. Until the operation, the image is displayed in this state. Here, as shown in the figure, although an effect is displayed by displaying an image integrally in the entire area of the liquid crystal display 51 including the transmission area (winning determination area), the back of the transmission area (winning determination area) is displayed. The symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen through with some transparency.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub control unit 91, there is a prize effect as an effect by changing the lighting state of the reel LED 55 based on a command output to the LED drive circuit 93.

  In principle, the winning effect is an effect of notifying the winning combination by blinking the reel LED 55 corresponding to the constituent symbols of the winning combination aligned on the effective line when any winning combination is aligned on the effective line. However, as an exception, when the challenge bonus (1) and replay (2) are won together with the winning line L1 or L4, the game is actually stopped at the winning line L1 or L4 with the challenge bonus (1) and replay (2). The combination of symbols stopped on the virtual winning line Lv by blinking the reel LED 55 corresponding to the symbol combination (cherry-any-any) stopped on the virtual winning line Lv without blinking the reel LED 55 corresponding to the symbol being displayed Is emphasized to be notified. In addition, when the challenge bonus (1) and replay (2) are won in line other than the winning line L1 or L4, and when the challenge bonus (2) is won in any of the winning lines, no winning effect is performed. It is like that.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the startup process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, and the like are initialized (Sm1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sm2), and when the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sm2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sm3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired, Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sm4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sm5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sm6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sm6, the RAM parity of all the storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sm7). Is determined (Sm8). If the power interruption interrupt process (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step Sm8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sm10), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sm8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sm9). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set, and if the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sm9 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal also in cases other than 5A (H) stored sometimes, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sm10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 24, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sm51), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sm52). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked, and it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error (Sm53), indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error. In the case of an error code, after initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sm54), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed. To do.

  If it is determined in step Sm53 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM error or an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sm55). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sm56), and if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm55. Return. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in step Sm55, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in step Sm56, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sm57). ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in step Sm51 (Sm58), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormal error and the abnormal winning error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, so that the error processing is canceled. The error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated in the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error or an abnormal winning error.

  Returning to FIG. 23, if it is determined in step Sm9 that the data for failure diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the unsaved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sm11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sm12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state stored in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sm14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in step Sm6, initialization 1 is executed to initialize all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sm15). The value stored in the set value work (0 at this time) is corrected to 1 (Sm16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sm17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 25, ie, the setting change mode is entered (Sm18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 25, since the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process, 1 is set here). Is read out (Sm81).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sm82, Sm83). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sm82, the set value read in the step of Sm81. 1 is added (Sm84), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sm85). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sm82 and Sm83, if the set value after addition is 7 in the step Sm85, the set value is corrected to 1 (Sm86 ) Again, the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sm82 and Sm83 Back to out waiting for the state.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in step Sm83, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sm87). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sm88). If it is determined in step Sm88 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 23 and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, the interruption interruption process (main) is not performed even if the interruption occurs. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process (main), and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the CPU 41a is restarted, the game cannot be restarted even if the CPU 41a is restarted, except when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sm100), an internal lottery process (Sm200), a reel rotation process (Sm300), a winning determination process (Sm400), a payout process (Sm500), and a game end process (Sm600) are executed in order. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sm100, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sm200, random numbers for internal lottery are extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sm100, and winning in each of the above-described combinations is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in step Sm300, the process of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in step Sm400, when it is determined in step Sm300 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has stopped, a winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sm500, when it is determined in step Sm400 that a winning has occurred, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sm600, a process for setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. Further, in the game end process, an RT process for performing control related to RT is also performed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sm200.

  In the internal lottery process of this embodiment, first, a prescribed number that is a predetermined number of medals inserted according to the game state of the game is read (Sm201), and the process proceeds to step Sm202. The prescribed number is 3 in the normal gaming state and RT, and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In step Sm202, it is determined whether or not the inserted number of medals, that is, the value of the BET counter is the specified number read in step Sm201. If the inserted number of medals is the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sm203. If the input number is not the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sm204.

  In step Sm203, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the set value is in the range of 1-6, the process proceeds to step Sm205, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sm204.

  In step Sm204, since it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  In step Sm205, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sm206. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In step Sm206, the state number (any of 0 to 12) is stored in the RAM 41c in accordance with the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to step Sm207. In the step of Sm207, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sm208. In the step of Sm207, if the state number is 0-3, that is, if any special role is not carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) or RT (3), the lottery is performed first. When 0 (big bonus (1)) is set as the target role number and the state number is 4 to 7, that is, either in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2) or RT (3) If the special role is carried over, or if the status number is 9 to 12, that is, CT, CT + RT (1), CT + RT (2) or CT + RT (3) When 12 (replay (1)) is set and the state number is 8, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 21 (JAC) is set as the winning number to be drawn first.

  In step Sm208, it is checked whether or not the state number is 8, that is, whether the regular bonus is being performed. If the state number is 8, that is, if the regular bonus is being performed, the process proceeds to step Sm210. . If the status number is not 8, the process proceeds to step Sm209.

  In the step of Sm209, it is confirmed whether or not the role number as the lottery target is 21, that is, whether or not the lottery of all the lottery targets in the gaming state other than the regular bonus has ended. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm211. If not 21, the process proceeds to step Sm210.

  In the step of Sm210, it is confirmed whether or not the number of the role to be drawn is 28, that is, whether or not the lottery of all the roles to be drawn in the regular bonus has been completed. Proceed to step. If not 28, the process proceeds to step Sm212.

  In step Sm211, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the process proceeds to step Sm221.

  In step Sm212, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table is 1 in association with the processing target role number. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step Sm213. Advances to step Sm214.

  In step Sm213, the address of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sm215.

  In the step of Sm214, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the number of determination values of the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table is stored in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the area. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sm215.

  In step Sm215, the number of determination values acquired in step Sm213 or Sm214 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of addition is set as a new random number value. The process proceeds to step Sm216, and the number of determination values is determined by internal lottery. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sm218. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sm217.

  In step Sm217, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sm208.

  In the step of Sm218, it is confirmed whether or not the role number is 0 to 11, that is, whether or not it is a role number indicating a special role or a combination of roles including the special role. If the role number is 0 to 11, the step of Sm219 is performed. If the combination number is not 0-11, the process proceeds to step Sm220.

  In the step Sm219, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step Sm220, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, and the process proceeds to step Sm221. In the step Sm220, when the combination number is 0 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

In step Sm221, it is determined whether or not the CT is in progress, that is, whether the state number is 9 to 12. If the CT is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sm222. Return to the flowchart.

  In step Sm222, the winning flags are set corresponding to all kinds of small roles in the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sm300.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Sm301), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in step Sm301, a new wait time is set (Sm302).

  Next, the setting at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Sm303). Then, referring to the table index, the table creation data is specified, and the stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels based on the specified table creation data Is created for each reel that is rotating (Sm304), and a setting is made when stop preparation is completed (Sm305). As a result, the stop operation can be enabled, and then the stop operation becomes effective when the constant speed rotation of the reel is detected in the timer interruption process (main), which will be described later, during the origin passage process. It becomes.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected (Sm306). If any stop switch is not detected, a reel rotation error (a certain period or more) is detected. Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Sm307). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected outside the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected outside the medal payout period) Error) is determined (Sm308, Sm309), and steps Sm307 to Sm309 are performed. The occurrence of any error Te to be determined, the flow returns to step Sm306.

  If it is determined that a loading error has occurred in step Sm308, or if a dispensing error is determined in step Sm309, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Sm310). ), The process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 24 (Sm311). When the error is released, the process returns to step Sm306 again.

  If it is determined in step Sm307 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Sm312), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 24 (Sm313). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to step Sm303 again, and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Sm306, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) is calculated. After obtaining and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel (Sm314), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Sm315).

  When the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation is stopped, the detection of the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel is invalidated, and then it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (Sm316). If not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sm304, and if all the reels are stopped, the reel rotation processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning time process executed by the CPU 41a in the winning determination process in step Sm400.

  In the winning process, first, the game state (state number) of the game and the payout number of medals corresponding to the combination indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sm451), and the process proceeds to Sm452.

  In step Sm452, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the big bonus (1) has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sm454.

  If the big bonus (1) has been won in step Sm452, the big bonus (1) flag indicating that the big bonus (1) is in the RAM 41c is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored). (Sm453) and the process proceeds to Sm456.

  In step Sm454, it is further determined whether or not the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the big bonus (2) has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sm457.

  If the big bonus (2) is won in the step of Sm454, the big bonus (2) medium flag indicating the big bonus (2) is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sm455) and the process proceeds to Sm456.

  In the step Sm456, the value of the big bonus payout counter in which the total payout of medals in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0), and the process proceeds to the step Sm457.

  In step Sm457, it is determined whether or not the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If neither the challenge bonus (1) nor the challenge bonus (2) has been won in step Sm457, the winning process is terminated. If the challenge bonus (1) or challenge bonus (2) has been won in step Sm455, a challenge bonus medium flag indicating that the challenge bonus is in progress is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sm456), the process proceeds to step Sm457, the value of the challenge bonus payout counter in which the total payout of medals in the challenge bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sm457), and the prize is awarded. The time process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  30 to 34 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sm600.

  In the game end processing, first, it is determined whether or not RT (1) or RT (2) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (1) flag or RT (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in (Sm601), RT (1) or RT (2), the process proceeds to step Sm606. If it is during RT (1) or RT (2) in step Sm601, the number of RT games allocated to the RAM 41c for storing the number of remaining games of RT (1), RT (2) and RT (3) The counter value is decremented by 1 (Sm602), and it is determined whether the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, whether the RT game number counter value is 0 (Sm603). If the remaining RT game number is not 0 in step Sm603, the process proceeds to step Sm604, and if the remaining RT game number is 0, the RT (1) medium flag and RT (2) medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sm605) and go to step Sm606.

  In step Sm604, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) has been won. If the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) has been won, it is set in the RAM 41c. The RT (1) flag and the RT (2) flag are cleared (Sm605), and the process proceeds to the step Sm606. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is not won in the step Sm604, the process proceeds to Sm606. Proceed to step.

  In step Sm606, it is determined whether RT (3) is in progress based on whether the RT (3) in-progress flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in RT (3), the process proceeds to step Sm611. If RT (3) is in the step of Sm606, the RT game number counter value is decremented by 1 (Sm607), and it is determined whether the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, the RT game number counter value is 0. (Sm608). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in step Sm608, the RT (3) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sm610), and the process proceeds to step Sm611. If the number of remaining RT games is 0 in step Sm608, the process proceeds to step Sm609.

  In step Sm609, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) has been won. If the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) has been won, it is set in the RAM 41c. The RT (3) flag is cleared (Sm610), and the process proceeds to step Sm611. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is not won, the process proceeds to step Sm611.

  In the step of Sm611, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is not won, the process proceeds to the step of Sm616. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, the process proceeds to step Sm612 to determine whether or not the replay (2) is won.

  If replay (2) has not won in step Sm612, the process proceeds to step Sm616. If replay (2) has won, 500 is set in the RT game number counter (Sm613), and RT (1) is stored in the RAM 41c. ) If the medium flag and RT (2) medium flag are set, they are cleared (Sm614), then the RT (3) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm615), and the process proceeds to step Sm616.

  In step Sm616, it is determined whether a regular bonus is in progress. In the step of Sm616, when the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is being performed.

  If the regular bonus is not in effect at step Sm616, the process proceeds to step Sm620. If the regular bonus is in the step of Sm616, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1, and if a winning has occurred, the value of the regular bonus medium winning counter is incremented by 1 (Sm617), and the regular bonus end condition Is determined, that is, whether the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8 (Sm618). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sm618, the process proceeds to step Sm620. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sm619). , Go to step Sm620.

  In step Sm620, it is determined whether or not CT is in progress. In step Sm620, when the CT flag is set in the RAM 41c and the CT signal is ON, it is determined that CT is in progress.

  If the CT is not in the Sm620 step, the process proceeds to the Sm624 step. If CT is being performed in step Sm620, the value of the CT game number counter is decremented by 1 (Sm621), and whether or not the CT end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the CT game number counter is 0 is determined. Determine (Sm622). If the CT end condition is not satisfied in step Sm622, the process proceeds to step Sm624. If the CT end condition is satisfied, the CT flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sm623). Proceed to step.

  In step Sm624, it is determined whether a big bonus is in progress. In step Sm624, when the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c and the BB medium signal is ON, it is determined that the big bonus is being performed.

  If the big bonus is not in the step of Sm624, the process proceeds to the step of Sm634. If the big bonus is in effect, the payout number of medals of the game is added to the value of the big bonus payout counter (Sm625). It is determined whether or not the value of the medium payout counter exceeds 250 sheets (Sm626). If the value of the big bonus medium payout number counter does not exceed 250 in the step of Sm626, the process proceeds to step Sm631, and if the value of the big bonus medium payout number counter exceeds 250, the big bonus (2 ) It is determined whether or not the medium flag is set, that is, whether or not the big bonus is the big bonus (2) (Sm627).

  If the big bonus (2) medium flag is not set in step Sm627, that is, if the big bonus is the big bonus (1), whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 345 sheets Is determined (Sm628). If the value of the big bonus medium payout counter does not exceed 345 in step Sm628, the process proceeds to step Sm631, and if the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 345, the big bonus (1) The big bonus (1) end flag indicating the end game is set in the RAM 41c (Sm629), the big bonus (1) medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are cleared (Sm630), and the process proceeds to step Sm634. .

  If the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in step Sm627, that is, if the big bonus is the big bonus (2), the big bonus (2) medium flag and the regular bonus set in the RAM 41c are set. The middle flag is cleared (Sm630), and the process proceeds to Sm634.

  In step Sm631, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in step Sm631, the process proceeds to step Sm634. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in step Sm631, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sm632), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sm633), the process proceeds to Sm634.

  In step Sm634, it is determined whether a challenge bonus is in progress. In step Sm634, when the challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the CB signal is in the ON state, it is determined that the challenge bonus is in effect.

  If it is not during the challenge bonus in step Sm634, the process proceeds to step Sm641, and if it is during the challenge bonus, the payout number of medals of the game is added to the value of the payout counter during challenge bonus (Sm635). It is determined whether or not the value of the medium payout counter exceeds 150 sheets (Sm636). If the value in the challenge bonus payout counter does not exceed 150 in step Sm636, the process proceeds to step Sm638. If the value in the challenge bonus payout counter exceeds 150, the value is set in the RAM 41c. The challenge bonus flag and CT flag are cleared (Sm637), and the process proceeds to Sm641.

  In step Sm638, it is determined whether or not the CT flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the challenge bonus is in effect and CT is not activated. If the CT flag is set in step Sm638, the process proceeds to step Sm641. If the CT flag is not set in step Sm638, the CT flag indicating that CT is in progress and the CT flag are set. A CT operation start flag indicating operation start is set in the RAM 41c (Sm639), the value of the CT game number counter is initialized (Sm640), and then the process proceeds to step Sm641. In this embodiment, since CT is configured to end in one game, determination in step Sm638 is not performed, and if the value of the payout counter in challenge bonus does not exceed 150 in step Sm636, Sm639 is used. You may make it progress to the step.

  In step Sm641, it is determined whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sm641, the process proceeds to step Sm645. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm642). ). If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step Sm642, that is, if the regular bonus is ended and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step Sm644. When the regular bonus medium flag is set in step Sm642, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm643). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in step Sm643, that is, when the regular bonus is reactivated during the big bonus, the process proceeds to step Sm644, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in step Sm643. If it is not present, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sm645. In step Sm644, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to step Sm645.

  In step Sm645, it is determined whether or not the CT signal among the external output signals is in an ON state. If the CT signal is not ON in step Sm645, the process proceeds to step Sm649. If the CT signal is ON, it is determined whether the CT flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm646). . If the CT flag is not set in step Sm646, that is, if CT ends and CT does not resume thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sm648. If the CT flag is set in step Sm646, it is determined whether a CT operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm647). If the CT operation start flag is set in step Sm647, that is, if CT is reactivated during the challenge bonus, the process proceeds to step Sm648, and if the CT operation start flag is not set in step Sm647, That is, when CT is in progress and the CT end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sm649. In step Sm648, the CT signal is turned off and the process proceeds to step Sm649.

  In step Sm649, it is determined whether a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in step Sm649, the process proceeds to step Sm652, and if the regular bonus operation start flag is set in step Sm649, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game. Then, the regular bonus operation start flag of the RAM 41c is cleared (Sm650), and the process waits until the output waiting time (tw) of the RB signal is elapsed (Sm651). When the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to Sm652.

  In step Sm652, it is determined whether or not the CT operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the CT operation start flag is not set in step Sm652, the process proceeds to step Sm655. If the CT operation start flag is set in step Sm652, that is, if CT starts from the next game, the RAM 41c The CT operation start flag is cleared (Sm653), and the process waits until the output waiting time (tw) of the CT signal elapses (Sm654). When the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to step Sm655.

  In step Sm655, it is determined whether the big bonus (1) flag or the big bonus (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If neither the big bonus (1) medium flag nor the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in step Sm655, the process proceeds to step Sm661, and the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set. If so, it is determined whether or not the BB medium signal of the external output signals is ON (Sm656). When the BB medium signal is ON in the step Sm656, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the big bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step Sm661, and the BB is being performed in the step Sm656. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sm657), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sm658) and enabling the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sm659), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sm658 elapses is performed (Sm660). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sm661.

  In the effect waiting process in step Sm660, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c, and the operation detection state of the settlement switch 10 is detected until the effect waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter elapses. When the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected in this state, the settlement process is performed, and when the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed, the production waiting process is terminated, Return to processing.

  In step Sm661, it is determined whether a challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the challenge bonus flag is not set in step Sm661, the process proceeds to step Sm664. If the challenge bonus flag is set, it is determined whether or not the CB signal in the external output signal is ON. (Sm662). If the CB medium signal is ON in the step Sm662, that is, if the challenge bonus is in progress and the next game is not the challenge bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step Sm664, and the CB is in progress in the step Sm662. If the signal is not in the ON state, that is, if the challenge bonus starts from the next game, the CB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sm663), and the process proceeds to Sm664.

  In step Sm664, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in step Sm664, the process proceeds to step Sm667. If the regular bonus flag is set in step Sm664, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sm665). If the RB signal is ON in the step Sm665, that is, if the regular bonus is in progress and the next game is not a regular bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step Sm667, and the RB is in progress in the step Sm665. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sm666), and the process proceeds to Sm667.

  In step Sm667, it is determined whether the CT flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the CT flag is not set in step Sm667, the process proceeds to step Sm670. If the CT flag is set in step Sm667, it is determined whether the CT signal in the external output signal is ON. Determination is made (Sm668). If the CT signal is ON in step Sm668, that is, if the CT is in progress and the next game is not a CT start game, the process proceeds to step Sm670, and the CT signal is displayed in step Sm668. If it is not in the ON state, that is, if CT starts from the next game, the CT-in-progress signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sm669), and the process proceeds to Sm670.

In step Sm670, it is determined whether or not the CB signal is on in the external output signal. If the CB signal is not ON in step Sm670, the process proceeds to step Sm674. If the CB signal is ON in step Sm670, whether or not the challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c is determined. Determine (Sm671).
If the challenge bonus flag is set in step Sm671, that is, if the challenge bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to step Sm674. If the flag in challenge bonus is not set in the step Sm671, that is, the challenge bonus is not set. When the process is to be ended, the CB medium signal of the external output signals is turned off (Sm672), and in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c, the general work including the big bonus (1) end flag setting area Initialization 2 is performed to initialize (Sm673), and the process proceeds to step Sm674.

  In step Sm674, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the BB medium signal is not ON in step Sm674, the process proceeds to step Sm696. If the BB medium signal is ON in step Sm674, the big bonus (1) flag or big bonus (2 ) It is determined whether the medium flag is set (Sm675). If the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the step Sm675, that is, if the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step Sm696, and the big bonus ( 1) When neither the medium flag nor the big bonus (2) medium flag is set, that is, when the big bonus ends, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned off (Sm676), and the remaining RT game In order to store the number, 30 is set in the RT game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c (Sm677), and the process proceeds to step Sm678.

  In step Sm678, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) end flag indicating the end game of the big bonus (1) is set in the RAM 41c (Sm678), and the big bonus (1) end flag is set in the RAM 41c. If so, the RT (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm679), and the process proceeds to step Sm681. If the big bonus (1) end flag is not set in the RAM 41c in step Sm678, an RT (1) flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sm680), and the process proceeds to step Sm681.

  In the step Sm681, after setting the effect waiting time of the ending effect in the register and enabling the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sm682), until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sm681 elapses, it is the same as Sm660. Next, an effect waiting process is performed (Sm683). And after completion | finish of the production waiting process in the step of Sm683, it progresses to the step of Sm684.

  In step Sm684, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is enabled. If the automatic settlement function is not enabled, the process proceeds to step Sm686, and the automatic settlement function is enabled in step Sm684. If it is, the settlement process is performed (Sm685), and then the process proceeds to Sm686.

  In step Sm686, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is not enabled in step Sm686, the process proceeds to step Sm696. If the stop function is enabled in step Sm686, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. (Sm687), and the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sm688). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sm689). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sm690), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm691), and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. , Return to step Sm689. If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sm689, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sm690, the process proceeds to the step Sm693, and the adjustment switch 10 is operated in the step Sm691. If it is detected, a settlement process is performed (Sm692), and the process returns to Sm687.

  In step Sm693, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sm694), and it progresses to the step of Sm695.

  In step Sm695, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work including the setting area of the big bonus (1) end flag in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c, and then the process proceeds to step Sm696.

  In step Sm696, after initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c, the game end process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is inactive during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not in operation during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is not activated. If the bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, it is determined for each game whether or not the CT is inactive during the challenge bonus. If the CT is inactive during the challenge bonus, the CT is activated.

  Also, before determining whether CT is inoperative, it is determined whether a challenge bonus end condition is satisfied. If the challenge bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, CT is It is determined whether or not it is inactive, and if it is not in operation, the CT is activated.

  Further, when operating the CT, it waits in a state in which the CT signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the CT signal indicating that CT is in progress, and when the output waiting time elapses, the CT signal is output. Even if the CT is operated continuously during the challenge bonus, the output of the CT signal stops, and when the output waiting time (tw) elapses in this state, the CT is being performed again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the settlement of the credit is performed. Control will be performed. In addition, even when the settlement switch 10 is activated, detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, credit settlement control is performed.

  Also, at the end of the big bonus or at the end of the big bonus, until the waiting time for the performance for performing the BB winning effect and the ending effect has passed, the transition to the next game will not proceed and the waiting time for the performance will elapse. Until the setting of the bet number is permitted, the medal lending is not permitted.

  In addition, when automatic payment is performed at the end of the big bonus, the automatic payment is completed and the setting of the bet number is permitted without shifting to the BET process of the next game until the automatic payment is completed. Until then, medals are not allowed to be lent. Furthermore, when the big bonus is ended, when the stop state is controlled, the stop state is released and the bet amount is not changed until the next game is released. Until the setting is allowed, medals are not allowed to be lent.

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Smi1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Smi2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Smi3). In step Smi3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, ie, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Smi4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Smi8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Smi24 described later is executed (Smi5).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, ie, timer interrupt 2 (Smi6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, it is a reel motor. Reel start processing (Smi7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Smi8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Smi9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Smi2 is restored (Smi20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Smi21), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

  Also, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in step Smi6, LED dynamic display processing (Smi10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals for various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Smi11), random number update process for updating various software random numbers (Smi12), time counter update process for updating various time counters (Smi13), command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After sequentially executing the process (Smi14) and the external output signal update process (Smi15) for updating the external output signal, the register saved in the stack area in Smi2 is restored (Smi20), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Smi1 are permitted. (Smi21) and return to the process before the interruption

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in step Smi4, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for branching whether it is 3, ie, timer interrupt 4 (Smi16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Smi17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) to detect the occurrence of a reel rotation error, check if the stop preparation is complete, and if the stop preparation is complete and if it is rotating at a constant speed, the spinning reel Based on detection signals from various switches, these various switches satisfy the detection conditions. After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Smi19) for determining whether or not the register has been saved, the register saved in the stack area in Smi2 is restored (Smi20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Smi1 step are permitted (Smi21). Return to the process before interrupt.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in step Smi16, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch processing (Smi22), the number of steps calculated by the stop switch processing is counted, stop processing (Smi23) for starting braking by two-phase excitation when it is time to stop, and braking in the stop processing. After executing the final stop process (Smi24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start, the registers saved in the stack area at Smi2 are restored (Smi20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Smi1 step are permitted. (Smi21) to return to the process before the interruption.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control content of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle and right, it is determined whether or not a stop operation position has been set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, whether or not a stop operation has been detected ( Smi101, Smi102) If the stop operation is not detected for all the reels, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any of the reels is detected in step Smi101, the process proceeds to step Smi103, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred to, and the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. From the area number including the number of steps of the stop operation position, the area number to be the stop position is specified, and the process proceeds to step Smi104.

  In step Smi104, the number of steps required to reach the stop position specified in step Smi103 is calculated from the number of steps from the current reel reference position, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 38 shows a power interruption interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 2, that is, when a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is inputted, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the power interruption interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Smi201). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing (main). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Smi202). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Smi203). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Smi202 is restored (Smi204), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Smi201 is permitted (Smi205), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Smi203, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Smi206), and all output ports are initialized (Smi207). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Smi208), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Smi209).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Smi 210, where Smi 210 is the same process as Smi 203), the process enters a loop process in which no process is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In the effect control board 90, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board 100, the sub control unit 91 is activated. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91. When the effect control main process is started, first, a predetermined effect initial setting process is executed (Ss1). Details of the effect initial setting process will be described later.

  When the effect initial setting process is completed, an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 such as the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state when the power supply is stopped is executed (Ss2). Details of the effect control restoration process will also be described later.

  After executing the effect control restoration process, after interrupting is prohibited (Ss3), the effect side random value update process is executed (Ss4), and the interruption is permitted (Ss5). . The effect random number value update process executed in Ss4 is a process for updating all or part of the random value used on the effect control board 90 side by software.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect initial setting process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss1 of FIG. In the effect initial setting process, first, interruption is prohibited (Ss101), and an interrupt mode is set (Ss102).

  Next, settings relating to the stack pointer, such as setting of the designated address of the stack pointer, are performed (Ss103). Further, the built-in device register is set (initialized) in the sub-control unit 91 (Ss104). Then, setting (initialization) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in peripheral circuits in the sub-control unit 91 is performed (Ss105). Thereafter, the RAM 91c is set to be accessible (Ss106).

  Thereafter, the VDP 141 is initialized, for example, after transmitting a predetermined initialization signal to the VDP 141 and then transmitting initial setting data for setting in the built-in register of the VDP 141 (Ss107). Accordingly, in the VDP 141, for example, the storage contents of the temporary storage memory 155 and the frame buffer memory 156 are initialized based on the initialization signal and the initialization data received from the sub control unit 91, the transfer control circuit 152, the drawing circuit, and the like. 154 or the moving picture decoder 158 or the like is interrupted, or the storage area in the frame buffer memory 156 corresponding to the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is assigned to set the display area. When the display image update period in the liquid crystal display 51 is set, at least one of various setting operations performed is executed.

  Next, for example, setting for generating a random value used on the side of the effect control board 90 is performed such as setting the operation of the random number circuit 134 based on the random number initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss108). Further, for example, an interrupt is set by setting a reset / interrupt controller or a CTC register based on the interrupt initial setting data stored in the ROM 91b (Ss109). As a result, the sub-control unit 91 generates a timer interrupt for controlling the rendering operation every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds). Then, the effect initial setting process ends.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect control restoration process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss2 of FIG. First, a data check of the RAM 91c is performed, and it is determined whether or not the check result is normal (Ss201). In this process, for example, a checksum is calculated using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the calculated checksum and an effect checksum buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 91c are stored. Compare with checksum. The effect checksum buffer stores a checksum calculated by the same processing when the power supply was stopped last time. This effect checksum buffer is included in the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the contents of the effect checksum buffer are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply is stopped. If the comparison result between the calculated checksum and the checksum stored in the effect checksum buffer does not match, it is determined that the check result is not normal.

  When the check result of the data in the RAM 91c is normal, it is determined whether or not the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is ON (Ss202). The state of the effect backup flag is set in the effect control flag setting unit when the power supply is stopped. And the setting location of this production backup flag is backed up by the backup power source, so that the state of the backup flag is saved even when the power supply is stopped.

  When the production backup flag is ON, the production backup flag is cleared to the OFF state (Ss203), and then the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped. Setting is performed (Ss204). For example, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 91b is set as a pointer, and the contents of the backup table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 91c. Here, when the work area of the RAM 91c is backed up by a backup power source, if the initialization data for the area that can be initialized is set in the work time setting table, the backup time setting table is set. good. Subsequently, the production backup data for restoring the control state is read from the backup area of the RAM 91c backed up by the backup power source, and the settings of the internal register of the CPU 91a and the work area of the RAM 91c are sub-controlled according to the read data. The state before the unit 91 is restarted is restored.

  Thereafter, based on the setting in step Ss204, for example, a display control command corresponding to the restored state is transmitted to the VDP 141, and various controls in the VDP 141 are restarted (Ss205). Then, the effect control restoration process is terminated. Note that after executing the process of Ss205, for example, the process may return to the process corresponding to the comparison value set in the program counter by the return of the control state in Ss204.

  Also, if the data check result of the RAM 91c is abnormal in Ss201, or if the effect backup flag is OFF in Ss202, the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss206). Subsequent to the initialization of the RAM 91c, settings at the time of initialization for setting the internal state of the sub-control unit 91 to the initial state are performed (Ss207). Then, the effect control restoration process is terminated.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt for controlling the progress of the production at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) according to the setting of the interrupt in Ss109, and the timer / allocation of the RAM 91c is performed by the reset / interrupt controller. Is set to the ON state. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an effect control interrupt process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in response to the timer interrupt flag being set to the ON state.

  In the effect control interrupt process, first, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (Ss301), and the contents of the internal register are saved (Ss302). Next, an effect backup process, which will be described later in detail, is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, data necessary for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up (Ss303). Then, the reset circuit 95 is cleared by setting control data for turning on the initialization signal in a predetermined output port included in the I / O port 91d (Ss304).

  Next, a command analysis process for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed (Ss305), and an effect control process described in detail later is executed (Ss306). By this effect control process, various effects such as display of images on the liquid crystal display 51 are performed according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Next, effect random number value update processing is performed, and various random number values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the effect control board 90 side (Ss307). Thereafter, the contents of the register saved in Ss302 are restored (Ss308), and the effect control interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing in detail the effect backup process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss303 of FIG. In the effect backup process, the data for effect backup is set using stored data in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss401). Here, for example, depending on the values of various flags provided in the effect flag setting unit of the RAM 91c and the values of various timers provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 91c, the control state in the sub control unit 91 and the display control circuit 92 If the progress of various processes can be specified, the production backup data may be configured by data indicating the values of these flags and timers. For example, if the control state of the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 can be specified from the stored value of the internal register (for example, program counter) of the CPU 91a, the stored value of such internal register The production backup data may be configured with the data indicating. Alternatively, the effect backup data may be configured by combining data indicating the value of the flag or timer and data indicating the stored value of the built-in register. In addition, even if any data that can be recovered after restarting by specifying the control state in the sub-control unit 91 and the progress of various processes in the display control circuit 92 is included in the production backup data good.

  Next, check data is created, for example, by calculating a checksum using data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Ss402). And the effect backup flag provided in the effect control flag setting part of RAM91c is set to ON state (Ss403), and effect backup processing is complete | finished. When a part of the RAM 91c is backed up by a backup power source, the production backup data created in Ss401, the check data created in Ss402, the data indicating the production backup flag set in the ON state in Ss403, etc. Then, it may be stored in the backup area of the RAM 91c at the end of the effect backup process.

  44 to 47 are flowcharts showing in detail the effect control process executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 in Ss306 of FIG. Note that this effect control process is completed within a time of less than 2 milliseconds, regardless of the procedure executed. That is, the production control interruption does not occur repeatedly during the execution of the production control process.

  In the effect control process, the CPU 91a determines whether any command has been received from the effect control board 40 as a result of the command analysis process in Ss305 (Ss501). If it is determined that no command has been received, it is determined whether a demo invalid flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss509).

  The demonstration invalid flag is in a narrowly defined game from the operation of the start lever 7 until the display result is derived to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (until the payout is completed when the medals are paid out) as will be described later. In this case, even when the game is not being played, a continuous effect or a bonus effect is being executed. If the demonstration invalid flag is set, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is also invalid, and the production control process is terminated without performing the production mode switching and the history display production as well as the demonstration production. Then, the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the demonstration invalid flag is not set, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is detected, and it is determined whether or not the player has instructed to switch the effect mode (Ss510). When the effect mode switching is instructed, an effect mode switching command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss511). As a result, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92 is updated to a mode different from the current mode (for example, if the current presentation mode is mode 1, it is mode 2). Is done. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If switching of the effect mode is not instructed, the operation of the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 is detected, and it is determined whether or not the player has instructed execution of the history display effect (Ss512). When execution of the history display effect is instructed, a history display flag indicating that the history display effect is being performed is set in the RAM 91c (Ss513). Further, a command for writing effect data for the history display effect is output to the display control circuit 92 together with the game history stored in the RAM 91c (Ss514). Thereby, the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data of the history display effect from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Then, the process proceeds to Ss518.

  If the execution of the history display effect is not instructed in Ss512, it is determined whether or not the internal timer of the CPU 91a has timed a predetermined time (Ss515). If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG. If the predetermined time has elapsed, a demonstration effect flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed is set in the RAM 91c (Ss516). Further, a command to write demonstration effect production data is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss517). Thereby, the demonstration control effect data is read from the CGROM 142 in the display control circuit 92 and written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Then, the process proceeds to Ss518.

  In Ss 518, a display command for the transmission area (winning determination area) is output to the display control circuit 92. As a result, information indicating that the transparent area object is not set is stored in the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and the demonstration effect or the history display effect is performed when there is no transparent area object in the foreground. Images are displayed in the 2L, 2C, and 2R transmission areas (winning determination areas) without increasing the transparency. Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss519). As a result, the image corresponding to the effect data of the demonstration effect or the history display effect written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92 includes all of the liquid crystal display 51 including the transmission area (winning determination area). Will be done in the region. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If it is determined in Ss501 that any command has been received, the time measurement by the internal timer of the CPU 91a is started again from 0 (Ss502). Next, it is determined whether the demonstration effect is being executed based on whether the demonstration effect flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss503). If the demonstration effect is being executed, the demonstration effect flag in the RAM 91c is first erased (Ss504), and the demonstration effect effect data erase command is output to the display control circuit 92 together with the effect termination command (Ss505). Thereby, the demonstration effect ends, and the demonstration effect effect data is deleted from the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92. Then, the process proceeds to Ss520.

  If the demonstration effect is not being executed, it is determined whether the history display effect is being executed based on whether or not the history display effect flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss506). If the history display effect is being executed, the history display effect flag in the RAM 91c is first erased (Ss507), and the effect data erase command is output to the display control circuit 92 together with the effect end command (Ss508). Thereby, the history display effect is ended, and the effect data of the history display effect is deleted from the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92. Then, the process proceeds to Ss520.

  In Ss520, the type of the received command is determined based on the result of the command analysis process in Ss305. If the received command type is a BET command, it is determined whether the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Ss521).

  If the value of the continuous counter is 0 in Ss520, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning effect flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss528). If the bonus winning effect flag is set, the bonus winning effect is ended here, and the bonus winning effect flag is deleted from the RAM 91c (Ss529). In addition, since the bonus winning effect is still performed on the liquid crystal display 51 after winning the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus (1) in the previous game, the end command of the effect is given here. At the same time, an instruction to delete the effect data of the bonus winning effect is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss530). As a result, the bonus winning effect is ended and the bonus winning effect data is deleted from the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the bonus winning effect flag is not set, it is determined whether RT (1) or RT (2) has ended in the previous game based on the gaming state stored in the RAM 91c (Ss531). If RT (1) or RT (2) has ended in the previous game, the chance zone effect is ended here, so the chance zone effect flag set in the RAM 91c is deleted (Ss532). . In addition, since the chance zone effect is still being performed, an instruction to erase the effect zone effect data is output to the display control circuit 92 together with the end command of the effect (Ss533). As a result, the chance zone effect ends and the effect data of the chance zone effect is deleted from the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If RT (1) or RT (2) is not completed in the previous game in Ss531, a challenge bonus (2) is further obtained in the previous game based on the information indicating whether or not a winning is stored in the RAM 91c. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (Ss534). If the challenge bonus (2) has been won in the previous game, a bonus-in-progress flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss535).

  Next, a command to write effect data for the effect during bonus is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss536). Thereby, the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data of the bonus medium effect from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Further, since the demonstration effect and the history display effect are not performed while the bonus effect is being performed, a demonstration invalid flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss537). Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss538). As a result, the image corresponding to the effect data of the demonstration effect or the history display effect written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92 includes all of the liquid crystal display 51 including the transmission area (winning determination area). Will be done in the region. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the challenge bonus (2) has not been won in the previous game in Ss534, it is determined whether or not the bonus end effect flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss539). If the bonus end effect flag is set, it is further determined whether or not the bonus end effect is associated with the end of the big bonus based on the gaming state of the previous game stored in the RAM 91c (Ss540). If it is a bonus end effect accompanying the end of the big bonus, the bonus zone end effect is ended and then the chance zone effect is started. Therefore, the bonus winning end flag is deleted from the RAM 91c and the chance zone effect is also displayed. The middle flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss541).

  Next, a bonus zone production effect data write command is output to the display control circuit 92 together with a bonus end production effect data erase command (Ss542). Thereby, the bonus end effect is ended in the display control circuit 92, and the bonus end effect effect data is deleted from the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and then the chance zone effect effect data is read from the CGROM 142. Is read out and written into the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss543). Thereby, an image corresponding to the effect data of the chance zone effect written in the effect data region of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92 is displayed in the entire region of the liquid crystal display 51 including the transmission region (winning determination region). It will be. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If it is not the bonus end effect accompanying the end of the big bonus in Ss540, the bonus end effect is ended here, so the bonus winning end flag is deleted from the RAM 91c (Ss544). In addition, since the big bonus or the challenge bonus is ended in the previous game and the bonus end effect is still performed on the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction to erase the effect data of the bonus end effect is displayed together with the end command of the effect here. The data is output to the control circuit 92 (Ss545). Thereby, the bonus end effect is ended and the bonus end effect data is deleted from the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the value of the continuous counter is not 0 in Ss521, since the continuous effect is still being executed, the value of the continuous counter is subtracted by 1 here (Ss546). As a result of this subtraction, it is determined again whether or not the value of the continuous counter has become 0 (Ss547). If the value of the continuous counter has not yet become 0, the effect control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG. When the value of the continuous counter becomes 0, an effect end command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss548). Thereby, the display control circuit 92 stops the generation of the image data based on the effect data of the continuous effect, and the continuous effect performed on the liquid crystal display 51 ends.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning situation stored in the RAM 91c in the previous game indicates that any special role is won (Ss549). Here, even if the winning situation in the previous game indicates that the special role is won, if the special role is won, the value of the continuous counter becomes 0, so the processing of Ss549 is performed. Is a state in which the winning flag for the special role is carried over.

  If the winning status of the previous game in Ss549 indicates that the special role is won, a command to write the effect data for the jackpot effect is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss550). As a result, the display data of the big hit effect is read from the CGROM 142 in the display control circuit 92 and written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The effect data of the continuous effect is erased by writing the effect data of the jackpot effect (at least the first data of the effect data of the continuous effect is deleted, so even if some data remains Impossible).

  Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss551). Here, since the effect data of the big hit effect is stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92 and no transmission area object is set, the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is set. The jackpot effect is performed in the area including (however, since information indicating that the transmission area (winning determination area) is made semi-transparent is stored, the transmission area (winning determination area) is semi-transparent). Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the winning status of the previous game does not indicate that any special role is won, a command to write the production data of the lost effect is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss552). As a result, the effect data of the lost effect is read from the CGROM 142 in the display control circuit 92 and written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The effect data of the continuation effect is deleted by writing the effect data of the losing effect. Impossible).

  Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss553). Here, the effect data of the loss effect is stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and the transmission area object is not set. Therefore, the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is set. Loss effect is performed in an area including (however, since information indicating that the transmission area (winning determination area) is made semi-transparent is stored, the transmission area (winning determination area) is semi-transparent). Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the received command type is an internal winning command, first, the winning status indicated by the internal winning command is stored in the RAM 91c (Ss554). Next, an effect end command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss555). As a result, even if some effect data remains set in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, the effect is temporarily ended by receiving the internal winning command transmitted at the game start timing. Will be.

  Next, a transmission command for the transmission area (winning determination area) is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss556). As a result, information indicating that the transparent area object is set is stored in the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and the transparent area object to be processed with the highest priority in each frame period is set to the forefront. Even when an image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed on the display 51, nothing is displayed in the transmission area (winning determination area), and the symbols of the reels 2L, 3C, and 3R on the back of the liquid crystal display 51 are displayed. Will be completely transparent and shown to the player. In addition, an image display command corresponding to the effect mode is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss557). As a result, an image corresponding to the effect mode stored in the effect mode area of the temporary storage memory 155 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (excluding the transmission area (winning determination area)).

  Next, with reference to the gaming state saved in the previous game (that is, the gaming state of the current game), it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the current game is RT (3) (Ss558). If the game state of the game is not RT (3), refer to the game state saved in the previous game (that is, the game state of the current game) to determine whether the game state is a big bonus or a challenge bonus. Determination is made (Ss559). If the game state of the current game is neither a big bonus nor a challenge bonus, it is determined whether or not the chance is stopped based on the combination of display results derived from the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R saved in the previous game. Determination is made (Ss560). If the chance is not stopped, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the game state of the current game is a big bonus or a challenge bonus, it is determined whether or not a bonus-during production flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss561). If the during-bonus effect flag is set, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the bonus-in-progress flag is not set yet, the player won the Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), or Challenge Bonus (1) in the previous game, and the game state from this game is Big Bonus or Challenge Bonus This means that an effect during bonus is newly started, and a flag during effect during bonus is set in the RAM 91c (Ss562).

  Next, a command to write effect data for the effect during bonus is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss563). Thereby, the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data of the bonus medium effect from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Further, since the demonstration effect and the history display effect are not performed while the bonus effect is being performed, a demonstration invalid flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss564). Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss565). Here, the effect data of the bonus medium effect is stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and the transmission area object is set. Therefore, the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is set. The bonus medium performance is performed in the area excluding). Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the gaming state is RT (3) in Ss558, it is determined whether the during-RT effect flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss566). If the during-RT production flag is not set, it means that the player has won a replay (2) in the previous game and the gaming state will be RT (3) from this game, and a new production during RT is started. Therefore, an RT effect flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss567).

  Next, a command to write effect data for the effect during RT is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss568). Thereby, the display control circuit 92 reads the effect data of the effect during RT from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss569). Here, the effect data of the effect during RT is stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and the transmission area object is set. Therefore, the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is set. The effect during RT is performed in the area excluding). Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the during-RT effect flag is not set in the RAM 91c in Ss566, it is determined whether the number of remaining RT games is 3 (Ss570). If the number of remaining RT games is not three, it is determined whether or not any winning combination has been won in the previous game with reference to the information indicating the presence or absence of a prize saved in the previous game (Ss571). If any winning combination has been won in the previous game, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the chance is stopped in the previous game in Ss566, if the remaining number of RT games is 3 in Ss570, or if no role is won in the previous game in Ss571, the software random number function is used. A random effect is extracted, and an effect pattern for continuous performance is selected according to the value of the extracted random number and whether the winning status stored in the RAM 91c indicates winning of any special role (Ss578). Further, 3 is set as an initial value in the continuous counter of the RAM 91c (Ss579).

  Next, an effect data write command corresponding to the effect pattern selected for the continuous effect is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss580). Thereby, the effect data of the continuous effect corresponding to the effect pattern selected from the CGROM 142 in the display control circuit 92 is read and written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Further, since the demonstration effect and the history display effect are not performed while the continuous effect is being performed, the demo invalid flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss581). Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss582). Here, since the effect data of the continuous effect is stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92 and the transmissive area object is set, the transmissive area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is set. Continuous production is performed in the area excluding. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the received command type is a winning determination command, an image non-display command corresponding to the effect mode is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss583). As a result, the image corresponding to the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is deleted. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the received winning determination command indicates winning of a special role other than the challenge bonus (2), that is, winning of the big bonus (1), big bonus (2) or challenge bonus (2) (Ss584). ). If any special winning other than the challenge bonus (2) is not indicated, the process proceeds to Ss589.

  If the winning of a special role other than the challenge bonus (2) is indicated, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is 0 (Ss585). If the value of the continuous counter is 0, the process proceeds to Ss587. If the value of the continuous counter is not 0, the continuous effect is forcibly terminated here, so the value of the continuous counter in the RAM 91c is cleared to 0 (Ss586). Then, the process proceeds to Ss587.

  In Ss587, a bonus winning effect flag is set in the RAM 91c. Next, a command to write effect data for bonus winning effects is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss588). As a result, the bonus control effect effect data is read from the CGROM 142 in the display control circuit 92 and written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Even if bonus effect or continuous effect data has been written, the bonus winning effect data is deleted from the effect data area (at least the first of the continuous effect data). Data will be erased, so even if some data remains, it will be unrecognizable). Then, the process proceeds to Ss589.

  In Ss589, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92. As a result, if any effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, the liquid crystal display 51 starts an effect corresponding to the written effect data. However, since the transparent area object is still set here, the effect image is displayed in an area of the liquid crystal display 51 excluding the transparent area (winning determination area). Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the received command type is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command (that is, the gaming state applied in the next game) is stored in the RAM 91c (Ss590). Next, a command to make the transmissive area (winning determination area) semi-transmissive is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss591). As a result, information indicating that the transparent area object is not set is stored in the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and information indicating that the transparent area (winning determination area) is made semi-transparent is stored.

  Since the information indicating that the transmissive area (winning determination area) is made semi-transparent is stored in the temporary storage memory 155, the RGB values of the pixels corresponding to the transmissive area (winning determination area) in the liquid crystal display 51 are It is converted to a value close to white (that is, (31, 31, 31)) by white addition processing or semi-transparency processing as described above. For example, for a pixel with an RGB value of (0, 22, 10), the RGB value is (16, 32, 26) when the white addition process is performed, and the RGB value is (8) when the translucent process is performed. , 27, 21) (when the α value is 50%).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state command received here indicates that the gaming state applied in the next game is a normal gaming state (Ss592). If it is indicated that the game state is not normal, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If it is indicated that the game state is normal, it is determined whether or not the bonus during performance flag is set in the RAM 91c (Ss593). If the bonus effect data is not set, the process proceeds to Ss597.

  If the bonus bonus performance data is set, the big bonus or the challenge bonus has ended in the current game, so the bonus bonus performance is also ended, and the bonus bonus performance set in the RAM 91c is being completed. The flag is deleted (Ss594).

  Next, an instruction to write the effect data for the bonus end effect is output to the display control circuit 92 together with the effect end command (Ss595). As a result, the bonus effect is finished and the bonus control effect data is read from the CGROM 142 in the display control circuit 92 and written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. The effect data of the effect during the bonus is deleted by writing the effect data of the bonus end effect (at least the first data of the effect data of the effect during the bonus is deleted, so some data remains It becomes unrecognizable as well).

  Further, an effect start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss596). Here, the effect data of the bonus end effect is stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 of the display control circuit 92, and although the transmission area object is not set, the transmission area (winning determination area) is made semi-transparent. Since the information is stored, the bonus end effect is performed in the area including the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51. Then, the process proceeds to Ss597.

  In Ss597, since there is no case where the effect during the bonus is performed or the case where the continuous effect is performed, the demonstration effect and the history display effect can be performed before the next game is started. The demonstration invalid flag set in the RAM 91c is erased. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  If the received command type is another command, processing corresponding to each command type is executed (Ss598). Since the processing here is not related to the present invention, detailed description thereof is omitted. Then, the effect control process ends, and the process returns to the effect control interrupt process of FIG.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the moving image display process executed during the effect control interruption process during the moving image display period. First, the CPU 91a determines whether or not the image reproduced using the moving image effect data is the first frame image (Ss601). Here, it is determined whether the moving image file is newly read or continuously read from the effect control timer value or the like, and when it is newly read, it is determined that the image is one frame.

  When it is determined that the image is the first frame, the value of the moving image read pointer is set to a read address corresponding to the moving image file to be read. Initial setting is performed (Ss602). On the other hand, if it is determined that the image is not the first frame, the contents of the register saved in the process of Ss608 described later are restored when the previous moving image display process is completed (Ss610). .

  Thereafter, a moving image decoding start command is output to the display control circuit 92 (Ss603). In addition, the event interruption waiting timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit of the RAM 91c is initialized, and elapsed time measurement is started (Ss604). Next, it is determined whether or not the event interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is turned on (Ss605). Here, the event interrupt flag is set to the ON state in response to the occurrence of the event interrupt in the moving picture decoder when the reproduction of the image data corresponding to the image for one frame is completed in the VDP 141. The

  If the event interrupt flag is ON, after clearing the event interrupt flag and setting it to the OFF state (Ss606), for example, it is determined whether or not the decoding of the last frame of the effect data of one moving image has been completed. (Ss607). If it is determined that the final frame has not been decoded, the contents of the register are saved (Ss608). Then, the process proceeds to Ss609. If it is determined that the final frame has been decoded, the process proceeds to Ss609. In Ss609, a moving image decoding NOP command is output to the display control circuit 92, and the moving image display in-process is terminated.

  If the event interrupt flag is OFF in Ss605, the event interrupt wait timer value, which is the timer value in the event interrupt wait timer, is updated by adding 1 (Ss611). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated event interrupt wait timer value has reached a predetermined time limit determination value (Ss612). If the time limit has not been reached, the process returns to Ss605. When the time limit value is reached, a predetermined loop process is entered and waits until the sub-control unit 91 is restarted.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a reset / interrupt control process executed by the reset / interrupt controller included in the sub-control unit 91. In the reset / interrupt control process, the reset / interrupt controller, for example, receives a reset signal transmitted from the predetermined input terminal in the input port included in the I / O port 91d by the reset circuit 95 via the reset terminal of the sub-control unit 91. And whether the reset signal is in the ON state is determined (Ss701).

  If the reset signal is in the ON state, it is determined whether a predetermined reset ON determination time has elapsed (Ss702). Here, the reset / interrupt controller measures the elapsed time since it was first determined in Ss701 that the reset signal is in the ON state, and whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the reset ON determination time. Can be determined. In this case, the elapsed time is continuously measured in the period in which it is determined in Ss701 that the reset signal is in the ON state. In contrast, once the reset signal is determined to be in the OFF state, the elapsed time measurement operation may be initialized. When it is determined that the reset ON determination time has elapsed, the sub control unit 91 is reset and the sub control unit 91 is restarted (Ss703).

  If the reset signal is OFF in Ss701, or if the reset ON determination time has not elapsed in Ss702, whether or not a command reception interrupt has occurred due to reception of a command transmitted from the effect control board 40 Is determined (Ss704). At this time, if a command reception interrupt has occurred, for example, the command reception interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state (Ss705).

  If no command reception interrupt has occurred, for example, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt has occurred due to a predetermined CTC timing out (Ss706). At this time, if a timer interrupt has occurred, for example, a timer interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state (Ss707).

  If it is determined that the timer interrupt has not occurred, it is determined whether or not an event interrupt has occurred by determining whether or not the event interrupt signal from the VDP 141 has been turned on (Ss708). . If an event interrupt has occurred, for example, the event interrupt flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state (Ss709).

  If it is determined that no event interrupt has occurred, it is determined whether another interrupt has occurred (Ss710). At this time, if any interrupt has occurred, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined interrupt flag to an ON state corresponding to the generated interrupt is executed (Ss711). When it is determined in Ss710 that no other interrupt has occurred, or after the processing of Ss711 is completed, the processing returns to Ss701.

  When a production data write command is input from the sub-control unit 91 via the host interface 151 in the VDP 141, the transfer control circuit 152 reads production data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 via the CGROM interface 153. The effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 is written. The production data that has been written so far becomes unrecognizable and is substantially erased. When the effect data erasure command is input, the effect data stored in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 is erased (however, it is only necessary that the data cannot be recognized as data).

  In addition, when an instruction mode switching command is input from the sub-control unit 91 via the host interface 151, the effect mode stored in the temporary storage memory 155 is switched. When a display command, a non-display command, and a transmission command for a transmission area (winning determination area) are input from the sub-control unit 91, information corresponding to each command is stored in the temporary storage memory 155.

  The drawing circuit 154 is based on the effect data stored in the temporary storage memory 155 in each frame period from when the start command for the effect is input until the end command is input (in the period for displaying the moving image). Further, when the moving image decoder 158 decodes the moving image in response to the moving image decoding command), the image data is developed in the frame buffer memory 156 (for writing).

  Here, when the moving picture decoder 158 receives the moving picture decoding command from the sub-control unit 91, the picture data indicating the image for one frame from the effect data transferred from the CGROM 142 to the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Is read. The picture data is read out in such an order that it can be played back in the order arranged in the effect data constituting the moving image. The picture data to be read is indicated by the value of the moving image read pointer. The moving picture decoder 158 decodes the read picture data, and stores the decoded picture data in a picture buffer pointer value among a plurality of picture buffers provided in the temporary storage memory 155.

  Thereafter, the value of the moving image read pointer and the value of the picture buffer pointer are updated, and an event interrupt signal is output to the effect control microcomputer via the host interface 151. After that, it waits in a state where the event interrupt signal is output only during the output period of the event interrupt signal, and when the output period of the event interrupt signal ends, the moving image corresponding to the moving image decoding command from the sub-control unit 91 This completes the decoding process.

  In this manner, the moving picture decoder 158 outputs an event interrupt signal to the sub-control unit 91 every time decoding of picture data for one frame is completed. For example, when the decoding of picture data is not completed, such as when a failure occurs in the decoding process of picture data, the event interrupt signal is not output. When the event interrupt signal is not output from the VDP 141 (moving image decoder 158) and the event interrupt waiting timer value reaches the time limit determination value, the sub-control unit 91 enters the loop process shown in FIG. Then, the effect control interruption process is not executed, and the sub-control unit 91 is restarted.

  The display circuit 157 reads the image data from the frame buffer memory 156 switched to read (that is, the image data was written in the previous frame period), and adds a predetermined synchronization signal to the liquid crystal display 51. Output to the LCD driver. It should be noted that the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51 outputs a driving signal for non-displaying an image to each pixel of the liquid crystal display 51 when no image signal is input from the display circuit 157. it can.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, combinations of winning symbols constituting the challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and one (4) are aligned on the effective line (winning line L1 or L3). When the challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and one (4) are won, by stopping the “cherry-any-any” combination on the virtual pay line Lv, The combination of “cherry-any-any” that will be awarded by Cherry is arranged on the virtual winning line Lv, so that it appears as if the Challenge Bonus (1), Replay (2), 1 (4) are won. When the “Cherry-any-any” combination is aligned with any active line or virtual pay line Lv, Depending on whether the line is an active line or a virtual winning line Lv, the winning is different (Cherry if it is aligned with the effective line, Challenge Bonus (1), Replay (2), 1 (4) if it is aligned with the virtual winning line Lv) ) Can be made to appear, the display mode of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at the time of winning can be made surprising and can be interesting.

  In this embodiment, “Cherry”, which is composed only of the left reel, stops at the virtual pay line Lv. For example, the challenge bonus (1), replay (2), 1 ( When the combination of 4) is prepared, the same symbol combination (for example, “white BAR-white BAR-white BAR”) or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “ When a combination of black BAR-black BAR-white BAR "is applied and a combination of challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and one (4) is prepared, a virtual pay line Lv In addition, the same symbol combination or a predetermined symbol combination may be arranged.

  Further, for example, when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the virtual winning line Lv, the combination of symbols aligned on the effective line is combined with the combination of “bell-bell-bell” on the effective line. When the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the virtual winning line Lv, it is actually on the active line. It is also possible to make it appear as if a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the virtual winning line Lv and Bell is awarded.

  Furthermore, a virtual symbol that is similar to the symbol that is the target of winning when it is aligned with the active line, but that is not the target of winning, is placed on the reel, and the combination of the symbol that is subject to winning and the pseudo symbol is the virtual winning line. When the symbols are aligned on the Lv, the combination of symbols aligned on the active line is determined as the winning symbol combination, and when the combination of the symbol to be awarded and the pseudo symbol is aligned on the virtual winning line Lv, The winning combination of winning symbols may be placed on the active line, and accordingly, the virtual winning line Lv may be displayed as if the winning combination of the symbol to be awarded and the pseudo symbol are aligned.

  In this embodiment, since the virtual winning line Lv is assigned to the horizontal symbol combinations, the symbol combinations arranged on the virtual winning line Lv are the diagonal symbol combinations, that is, the diagonal effective It is easier to understand than the combination of symbols arranged in a line, and the player's attention can be directed to the combination of symbols arranged on the virtual winning line Lv.

  Further, in this embodiment, when winning, as a combination of challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and 1 (4) that "Cherry-any-any" will be arranged on the virtual winning line Lv, "Orange-Replay-Bell", "Orange-Bell-Bell", and "Orange-Bell-Replay" are applied, respectively, and it is not a combination of the same symbols but a combination that is difficult to recognize that they are aligned on the winning line Therefore, not the combination of challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and 1 (4) aligned with the active line, but the combination of symbols (cherry-any-any) stopped on the virtual pay line Lv. The “Cherry-any-any” combination has stopped on the virtual pay line Lv, and the player's attention is drawn. Rukoto can.

  In this embodiment, the combination of winning symbols constituting the challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and one (4) is aligned with the active line (winning line L1 or L3), and the challenge bonus (1), When “Rechery (2)”, “1” (4) wins, and “Cherry-any-any” is on the virtual pay line Lv, the challenge bonus (1), replay (2), A reel corresponding to a combination of symbols (cherry-any-any) stopped on the virtual winning line Lv without blinking the reel LED 55 corresponding to the symbol stopped on the winning line L1 or L4 where one (4) is aligned. Since the LED 55 blinks, the combination of symbols stopped on the virtual winning line Lv is emphasized and notified, so that the challenge is aligned with the effective line. -It becomes possible to make a combination of symbols (cherry-any-any) stand out on the virtual winning line Lv instead of a combination of eggplant (1), replay (2), and one (4). The player's attention can be directed to the fact that the “any” combination has stopped on the virtual pay line Lv.

  In the present embodiment, the winning combination is notified by blinking the reel LEDs 55 corresponding to the constituent symbols of the winning lines and virtual winning lines. You may make it alert | report the winning combination by applying an effect (special effect) to an area | region.

  Further, in this embodiment, a combination of winning symbols constituting the challenge bonus (1), replay (2), and one (4), that is, a plurality of different types of combinations are arranged on the active line (winning line L1 or L3). When a challenge bonus (1), replay (2), or one (4) wins, it is possible to stop a common “cherry-any-any” combination on the virtual pay line Lv. Even when different winnings occur, the common symbol combination is stopped on the virtual winning line Lv. Therefore, even when the same “cherry-any-any” combination stops on the virtual winning line Lv. Since the value to be given varies depending on the winning actually generated, it is possible to make the game result surprising.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when a combination of winning symbols constituting the challenge bonus (1) and replay (2), that is, a challenge bonus advantageous to the player or a role that shifts to RT (3) wins, and 1 The gaming state does not change as in the case of the sheet (4), and the combination of “cherry-any-any” may stop on the virtual winning line Lv even when a small role to which a medal is awarded wins. Yes, even when the combination of “cherry-any-any” stops on the virtual pay line Lv, there may be a case where the player shifts to a challenge bonus or RT (3) that is advantageous to the player, or the virtual bonus line Lv may not be transferred. When the “Cherry-any-any” combination stops on the winning line Lv, the challenge bonus and RT (3) are transferred. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation to the door.

  Also, in this embodiment, when one (4) is won in a state where no special role is won, “Orange” stops at the bottom and one (4) is on the active line and wins. The “Orange” always stops at the top and one (4) is aligned with the active line, so the “Cherry-any-any” combination is always aligned with the virtual pay line Lv. On the other hand, when one (4) is won while the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won, “Orange” stops at the top and one (4) is on the active line. Since “Orange” stops at the lower stage and one (4) is aligned with the active line, the combination of “Cherry-any-any” is not aligned with the virtual winning line Lv. (4) are aligned with the active line The combination of “cherry-any-any” is not aligned with the virtual pay line Lv, but one (4) is aligned with the active line, and one medal is awarded, so that a big bonus (1) or It is suggested that the player has won the Big Bonus (2), so even if the “Cherry-any-any” combination does not fit in the virtual pay line Lv, Can be increased.

  In this embodiment, when one (4) is won in a state where none of the special roles have been won, “Orange” stops at the bottom and one (4) is aligned with the active line. The “orange” will always stop at the top and one (4) will be placed in line with the active line, but one with a special role won ( When 4) is won, one piece without any special role is won and one piece (4) is higher than when it is won (stop operation position). Even if (4) wins in line with the active line, one (4) wins without winning the “Cherry-any-any” combination on the virtual pay line Lv, Because winning is suggested, the combination of “cherry-any-any” Even if it is not aligned to the virtual winning line Lv it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role.

  In addition, one orange (4) is elected when any special role is elected, and “orange” is in the upper row when one special (4) is elected without any special character elected. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where one piece (4) is aligned with the active line and stopped, “Orange” does not stop at the upper stage, and one piece (4) is aligned with the effective line. In this way, if the special role is not won, the combination of “cherry-any-any” is aligned on the virtual winning line Lv and one (4) is won. Even though the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, the winning combination of the special role is won by winning one piece (4) without the “Cherry-any-any” combination on the virtual pay line Lv. As suggested, "cherry-any-any" Combination it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role even if it is not aligned to a virtual winning line Lv.

  Also, in this embodiment, when no special combination is won, replay (2), one (4) is won, and the combination of “cherry-any-any” is aligned with the virtual pay line Lv. Will always have replays (2) or one (4) on the active line, but big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) will be won, and "cherry-any-any" When the combination is aligned with the virtual pay line Lv, no role is aligned with the active line, the “Cherry-any-any” combination is aligned with the virtual pay line Lv, and no winning occurs. Therefore, it is suggested that the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, so the combination of “cherry-any-any” is added to the virtual winning line Lv. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role by Ukoto.

  In the present embodiment, as a bonus medium effect during the big bonus, a band-like image drawn as “BONUS GAME” is displayed across the middle area of each reel. On the other hand, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled, and in the regular bonus, the effective winning lines are limited to L1 and L2, that is, the winning line straddling the upper area of each reel and the winning line straddling the lower area. Since the symbols that have stopped in the middle area of the reels are not subject to winning judgment, a strip-shaped image is displayed across the middle area of each reel, making it easy to recognize the winning line that is valid during the regular bonus At the same time, during the regular bonus, there is an effect that displays the image using the area on the front of the reel that is not the target of winning determination, so that it is possible to achieve an impactful effect and the visual recognition of the symbols that are subject to winning determination It does not interfere with the progress of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the bonus medium effect is illustrated as an example of performing the effect using the front area of the reel that is not subject to winning determination, but may be used for other effects.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50, only combinations of symbols arranged in the middle (winning line L) are subject to winning determination. For example, these combinations are arranged on the winning line L as combinations of special roles and RT transitional roles. When the reel is stopped and “7” stops on the virtual winning line Lv, the front surface of the stopped “7” symbol is obtained as a reel arrangement in which “7-7-7” is aligned on the virtual winning line Lv. An image to which an effect (special effect) is applied may be displayed in the area, and in this way, an effect when the combination of “7-7-7” is arranged can be made with an impact. Even in this case, since the image is displayed outside the area that is actually the winning determination target, it is possible to realize an impactful effect and the progress of the game without disturbing the visual recognition of the winning determination target symbol. Will not be affected.

  Similarly to the above example, when only the combination of symbols (winning line L) arranged in the middle row is subjected to winning determination, and when these roles are aligned on the winning line L as a combination of special roles and RT transitional roles, In addition, as a reel arrangement in which “7-7-7” is aligned with the virtual pay line Lv, as shown in FIG. 51, a non-transparent image or the like is displayed in the area of the virtual pay line Lv when the reel is rotating. The state of the virtual winning line Lv is changed to a transparent image after all the reels are stopped by switching the virtual winning line Lv area to a transparent image. The combination may be invisible, and it may be possible to recognize for the first time that “7-7-7” is on the virtual pay line Lv after all have stopped. Even if the combination of “7-7-7” is complete, it is possible to make an impact, and since the image is displayed outside the area that is actually the winning determination target, an impact production is realized. In addition, the visual recognition of the symbol that is the target of the winning determination is not hindered, and the progress of the game is not affected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display result is further displayed until all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating and the display result is derived to the variable display device 2 after the game is started by operating the start switch 7. If the medal is paid out in response, the transparent area object is set and the transparent area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is set to non-display (completely transparent state) until the medal payout is completed. The In other words, while the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, particularly the area that is the target of winning determination, is ensured by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Does not affect the progress of the game. Further, even when all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, if there is a payout of medals, the transparent area (winning determination area) is set to non-display until this is completed. For this reason, it is possible to reliably grasp the winning of the small role that caused the medal to be paid out.

  Furthermore, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, an effect is produced as an integrated image in an area other than the transmission area (winning determination area) and the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51. However, even after all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, the transmission area (winning determination area) is set to a semi-transmission state (however, when there is a medal payout, the medal payout is not performed). Once completed, it is set to a semi-transparent state). Even though the transmissive area (winning determination area) is in a semi-transmissive state, it is possible to produce an effect by displaying images integrally in areas other than the transmissive area (winning determination area) and the transmissive area (winning determination area). Therefore, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect utilizing the large screen of the liquid crystal display 51 which is larger than that of the variable display device 2. When there is a medal payout, the image is displayed up to the transparent area (winning determination area) after the medal payout is completed, but the reel 2L, If rotation of all of 2C and 2R stops, an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 is started. Since the start timing of the presentation can be unified in this way, the control of the start timing of the presentation can be simplified, and the player can start the presentation by displaying the image on the liquid crystal display 51. It becomes easy to understand the opportunity.

  In addition, even when the original effect image color is dark (ie, the transparency is low), the image color in the transmissive area is light (ie, the transparency is high), so the reels behind A certain level of visibility can be ensured for symbols that are displayed stopped at 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured, the display result related to the presence / absence of a special role such as reach eyes, chance eyes or losing eyes can be confirmed as the display result of the variable display device 2, and the slot machine itself Does not impair the gameplay.

  The transparent area (winning determination area) is set to non-display until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating from the operation of the start switch 7 (however, when the medals are paid out until the payout is completed). As a process for that, a transparent area object corresponding to the range of the transparent area (winning determination area) is set. Here, when image data of an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is written in the frame buffer memory 156 in each frame period, the transparent area object is processed first. For this reason, even if some problem occurs during one frame period and image data cannot be drawn normally, the transparent area (winning determination area) is always set to non-display. For this reason, while the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continue to rotate, the visibility of the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be ensured.

  Further, a transparent area object is set from the operation of the start switch 7 until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R all start rotating (however, when the payout of medals is completed), the transparent area (winning determination area) The non-display) is a control that is always performed regardless of the game state in which the game is played. Therefore, the visibility of the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is ensured while the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continue to rotate, regardless of the gaming state of the slot machine 1. can do.

  Further, when the image signal is not supplied from the VDP 141, the liquid crystal driver of the liquid crystal display 51 outputs a drive signal corresponding to a transparent image as a drive signal for each pixel of the liquid crystal panel. Even when there is a failure in the circuit 92, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back of the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51.

  On the other hand, even if all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating and an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the RGB of each pixel included in the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. The value is higher than the RGB value of the original image by performing white addition processing or semi-transparency processing, and transparency is increased. For this reason, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect as a whole in a wide area including areas other than the transmission area (winning determination area) and the transmission area (winning determination area), and is drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The visibility of the displayed pattern can be increased.

  The white addition processing and translucent processing performed here need only be relatively simple calculations with only four arithmetic operations, so that the processing load is not increased for the calculation for increasing the RGB value of the pixels included in the transmissive region. Furthermore, by making it possible to select and apply white addition processing or translucent processing according to the presentation data and the display state of the image, it is possible to integrate with images displayed in areas other than the transmission area (winning determination area). , The visibility of the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the back of the transparent area (winning determination area) can be balanced (if the emphasis is on ensuring the visibility of the symbols, white addition processing Translucent processing is better if the emphasis is on image integrity.

  Further, although it is not an effect indicating the current game progress, it is not a period during the game from the operation of the start switch 7 to the derivation of the display result of the variable display device 2, in a period between games. If no game operation is performed, the demonstration effect is executed. When the player instructs the execution of the history display effect by operating the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57, the history display effect is executed. Furthermore, the presentation mode can be switched by operating the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 during the period between the games.

  When these demonstration effects and history display effects are performed, the transparent area object is not set, and the transparent area (winning determination area) is not set to the semi-transparent state. That is, in the demonstration effect and the history display effect, images are displayed in the same state in the liquid crystal display 51 other than the transmission area (winning determination area) and the area other than the transmission area (winning determination area). However, when these demonstration effects and history display effects are performed, the game is not progressing by the player (it is not simply an interval during the transition from the game to the game), and the reels 2L, 2C, The visibility of the pattern drawn on 2R is not a problem at all. In this way, where the visibility of the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R does not matter at all, the transmissive area (winning determination area) is not hidden or semi-transmissive, so that the liquid crystal display 51 The whole area can be used to dynamically create a unified production.

  When performing an effect performed by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51, the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 reads effect data of an effect to be executed in advance from the CGROM 142 based on a command from the sub-control unit 91, Must be written in the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Processing overhead required to read / write the effect data occurs. The effect data for continuous effects and the effect data for bonus effects are relatively large in amount because these effects are executed over a plurality of games, and the overhead required for reading / writing is also relatively large. It has become a big thing.

  Here, even if a continuous effect or a bonus effect is being executed, if the game operation is not performed for a predetermined period in the period between games, the demonstration effect is executed. The effect data of the effect must be read from the CGROM 142 and written in the execution effect data area. In this case, since the demonstration production data must be overwritten on the production data of the continuous production, if the demonstration production is finished after some game operation is performed, if the original continuous production is resumed, it will continue again. The effect data of the effect must be read from the CGROM 142 and written in the execution effect data area. The same applies when a history display effect is about to be executed by the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 by the player.

  In addition, even during the continuous production or during the bonus production, the production mode is switched in the period between the games, and the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 allows the production of the continuous production and the bonus production. If the effect mode can be switched, then the effect data corresponding to the new effect mode must be read from the CGROM 142 and written in the execution effect data. If this is allowed, the same processing must be performed many times each time the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 are operated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the demonstration invalid flag is not erased even if one game is ended, and the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is also invalid during execution of the continuous production or the bonus production production. It is left as it is. In other words, since the demonstration effect production data and the history display production effect data are prohibited from being read from the CGROM 142 and written into the execution production data area, the continuous production being executed and the production data in the bonus are the demonstration production and history. It is not overwritten by the effect data of the display effect and deleted from the execution effect data area. Since it is not erased, there is no need to read out the effect data of the continuous effect and the effect during the bonus from the CGROM 142 and write it in the execution effect data area.

  For this reason, in order to execute a demonstration effect or a history display effect that is not directly related to the current game progress, the effect data of a continuous effect or a bonus medium effect that has a large amount of data is read from the CGROM 142 and temporarily stored in memory. The overhead of the process of writing in the execution effect data area 155 is not duplicated. Since the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is also invalidated during the execution of the continuous production or the production during bonus, the production mode is not switched, and the same situation is dealt with only by the production mode being different. It is possible to prevent the overhead that the effect data has to be read from the CGROM 142 and written in the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155.

  The liquid crystal panel constituting the liquid crystal display 51 for displaying the above-described effect image is subjected to surface gloss treatment. Such a liquid crystal panel does not scatter light irradiated from the back as compared with a non-glare-processed liquid crystal panel (that is, has a higher transparency than a non-glare-processed liquid crystal panel). It reaches the eyes. For this reason, the visibility of the symbols drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be further improved.

  Further, the light emitted from the back surface of the liquid crystal display 51 is the light of the reel LED 55 provided inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the transmissive region, and the back in the liquid crystal display 51 in the region other than the transmissive region. It will be the light of the light. Here, since the power supply circuit for supplying the operating power to the reel LED 55 and the power supply circuit for supplying the operating power to the backlight in the liquid crystal display 51 are different systems, the reel LED 55 and the backlight are caused to fall together. Since it is almost impossible for light (excluding reflected light) to be irradiated from the back surface of the liquid crystal display 51, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 from becoming invisible. .

  The occurrence of an event interrupt is detected when the event interrupt signal from the VDP 141 is turned on by the reset / interrupt controller included in the sub-control unit 91. When the event interrupt generation is not detected by the reset / interrupt controller and the event interrupt wait timer value is generated in the time limit determination value, the CPU 91a enters a predetermined loop process, and produces an effect control interrupt corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Do not start the process. Then, since the reset circuit 95 is not cleared, a timeout occurs, and an ON-state reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the sub-control unit 91, causing the sub-control unit 91 to reset and restart. In this case, as in the case where the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the effect initial setting process in step S401 is executed, and the initial setting of the VDP 141 is performed. For this reason, when a predetermined waiting period elapses without detecting the occurrence of an event interrupt in the VDP 141 on the side of the sub-control unit 91, the VDP 141 can be initialized without executing dedicated processing. Thus, it is possible to appropriately recover from an abnormal display state while preventing an increase in program capacity and complication.

  In addition, when the sub control unit 91 executes the effect control interruption process in response to the occurrence of the timer interruption, the effect control process is executed therein, and the effect backup data is set in the backup area of the RAM 91c. To remember. When the effect control restoration process is executed in response to the restart of the sub control unit 91, the control state of the sub control unit 91 is restarted by the effect backup data stored in the backup area of the RAM 91c. Restore the previous state. As a result, when a predetermined standby time elapses without detecting the occurrence of an event interrupt in the VDP 141 on the side of the sub-control unit 91, the display operation that has been halfway can be executed continuously after restarting. This makes it possible to properly recover from an abnormal display state. In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 is restarted, it is not necessary to perform special control for restoring the control state, so that it is possible to appropriately restore from an abnormal display state while preventing complication of processing. Can do.

  Also, in this embodiment, after RT (3) where an increase in medals can be expected, any big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won before reaching the specified number of games. When the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won without finishing RT (3), or when the specified number of games is reached without winning the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) RT (3) is ended at the end of the game, and even after the start of RT (3), the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won before reaching the specified number of games. If Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) is not won, RT (3) will not be terminated by winning Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2). If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is not won, it is possible to continue control at RT (3) until the specified number of games is reached. If you win 1) or Big Bonus (2) but don't win the won Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2), you can spend RT (2) until you reach the specified number of games. Thus, there is no loss to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is carried over after the next game until the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins, RT (3) is the number of games specified. It is possible to win the Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) won in the meantime after finishing by arriving at, so when the RT (3) ends, the Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus ( It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning of 2).

  In addition, after the end of the big bonus, an increase in medals cannot be expected, but the winning probability of replay (2) (replay (1) + replay (2)) that triggers the transition to RT (3) where an increase in medals can be expected Is controlled to RT (1) or RT (2), and the control to RT (1) (2) shifts to RT (3) where an increase in medals can be expected. The expectation of the player can be increased. That is, since the probability of shifting to RT (3) varies depending on whether it is controlled by RT (1) or RT (2), the game flow can be sharpened.

  In addition, after the end of the big bonus (1), the winning probability of the replay (2) (replay (1) + replay (2)) rather than the RT (1) transferred after the end of the big bonus (2), that is, the medal It is controlled to RT (2) with a high probability of transition to RT (3) where increase can be expected, and is controlled by RT (1) (2) which functions as a chance zone to transition to RT (3). The probability of transition to RT (3) varies depending on the type of big bonus that triggered the game, so that the game flow can be further enhanced.

  Also, in this embodiment, even if the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) is won during RT (3) and the game is shifted to the challenge bonus, RT (3) does not end and the number of games is set. While RT (3) continues, the replay (1) lottery is performed with a higher winning probability than the normal gaming state, with RT (3) being controlled, even while RT (3) continues. Will be done. When the specified number of games is reached during the challenge bonus, RT (3) is ended and the winning probability of replay (1) is the winning probability of replay (1) in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the challenge bonus is always controlled by CT, and even if replay (1) is won in CT, the replay (1) cannot be withdrawn in the pull-in range of one frame with all reels rotating. The operation position (area number 6) or “replay” can be drawn up or down in the drawing range of one frame, but at the same time the “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage (area numbers 1 to 3) , 13 to 16, 21), the small reel can be won without winning Replay (1). In particular, the number of payouts is the largest in CT by performing a stop operation at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3, 6, 14 to 16 and 21) where the “bell” can be pulled into the upper stage or the lower stage within one frame drawing range. JAC can be awarded.

  Replay (1) during the challenge bonus does not affect the number of medals owned by the player or the end of the challenge bonus. If only the challenge bonus is considered, the player's profit will be affected. If a replay (1) wins with a challenge bonus when controlled by RT (3), the game is digested with a high probability of winning the replay, and RT ( Since the remaining number of games in 3), that is, the number of games that can increase the number of medals while receiving the special role lottery will be reduced, the challenge bonus when controlled by RT (3) is as much as possible. It becomes more advantageous to finish with a small number of games. On the other hand, since the challenge bonus is based on the condition that the number of medals paid out exceeds the specified number, in order to end the challenge bonus with a small number of games, it is better to win a small role than Replay (1). good.

  When Replay (1) is won in the Challenge Bonus, in order to win a small role, especially JAC, instead of Replay (1), stop operation at a timing when the composition pattern of Replay (1) is not within the drawing range of one frame Therefore, the technical intervention of the player in the challenge bonus when controlled by RT (3) is enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to remove the replay (1) and win a small role by narrowing the pull-in range during CT, and further advanced technical intervention is required. it can.

  Also, in this embodiment, in RT (3), in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), the opportunity that is likely to win the bonus has been derived. None of the roles won (Replay (1) wins during RT (3) with a very high probability, so if Replay (1) does not win and no other role wins) In this case, each of the continuous performances is executed, and finally it is notified whether or not the special role is won. That is, since the continuous performance is executed in response to an event that is highly likely to be won by the special role, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the special role.

  Also, in RT (3), the continuous production is executed even when the remaining three games are completed until the end, and the player's response to the fact that the special role was elected during RT (3) Expectation can be enhanced effectively.

  In particular, in continuous production during RT (3), even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a special role, replay (1) is won with a very high probability and replay (1) is controlled. Since priority is given to the control over special roles, it is difficult to determine whether or not a special role has been won, and the player's expectation for winning the special role is effective until the end of the continuous performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the continuous production more interesting.

  In this embodiment, the bonus winning effect is executed when the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus (1) is won, and the number of bets for the next game in which these winnings are generated. When the bonus bonus effect is not executed when the bonus bonus effect is performed while the bonus bonus effect is started when the above-mentioned bonus bonus effect is started, for the next game where the challenge bonus (2) is won. When the bet number is set, a bonus medium effect is started. That is, when the challenge bonus (2) is won, the bonus medium effect is directly executed by setting the bet number for the game in which the challenge bonus starts without accompanying the bonus winning effect. In particular, since the challenge bonus (2) is not missed and the symbols constituting the challenge bonus (2) are all different symbols and are not prominent symbols such as “7” or “BAR”, the challenge bonus (2 ) Is difficult to recognize that it is on the active line, if the challenge bonus (2) wins and you do not notice it, when you set the number of bets to start the next game, suddenly challenge It is possible to give an impression that the bonus has started, and it is possible to make the start of the challenge bonus highly interesting.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the regular bonus, when a small role other than the JAC is elected, the control that always accompanies the JAC and draws the combination of the JAC with the largest number of payouts to the active line is given priority. Therefore, when any small role is elected during the regular bonus, the JAC can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. . In other words, even when a role with a relatively small number of payouts such as cherries and 1 (1) to (4) is elected in the regular bonus, it is more than when JAC wins and cherries and 1 (1) to (4) wins. The number of medals that can be acquired during the regular bonus does not decrease because the cherries and one (1) to (4) are won.

  In addition, JAC is only eligible for regular bonus and CT, and is not eligible for other gaming conditions. JAC can be awarded only for regular bonus and CT, so regular bonus, CT, etc. In addition to clearly distinguishing between a gaming state advantageous to the player and other gaming states, it is possible to differentiate between the regular bonus and CT and other gaming states.

  In the present embodiment, the JAC with the largest number of payouts in the regular bonus is simultaneously selected when a small role smaller than the number of JAC payouts is won. However, if it is not the most paying small role in the regular bonus, but the most medals are awarded during the regular bonus by stopping on multiple winning lines, such small role will be You may make it win at the same time as a small role with a smaller number of payouts.

  Also, in this embodiment, the JAC, which is the small payout with the largest payout number in all gaming states, is simultaneously won when the small role with a smaller payout number is won in the regular bonus. If at least a small role with the highest number of payouts is selected at the same time when a small number with a smaller number of payouts is elected at the same time during the regular bonus, The number of medals that can be earned in a regular bonus is reduced. It does not have to be a small role with a large number of payouts.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the transition to the big bonus, and during the big bonus, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is activated, and the regular bonus is If it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus operates in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to increase the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, when the end condition is satisfied when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds the specified value without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment, Since the net increase in the number of players can be increased, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If there is no regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is inactive. If not, the regular bonus is activated, so the regular bonus will end despite the end of the big bonus. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the game is terminated when the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games or when a specified number of wins occur. The regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions, and may be ended only in one game or only once a winning is generated. Also, it may end when the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a prescribed number. The process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Also, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus, the big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds the specified value. For example, it ends when the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a specified value. Big bonus end condition when the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number of times, and the regular bonus ends Or any of these conditions may be satisfied, and the big bonus end condition may be satisfied.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is not necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before the regular bonus is activated again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the CT is activated simultaneously with the transition to the challenge bonus, and during the challenge bonus, it is determined for each game whether the CT is activated, and the CT is not activated. When it is determined that there is, the CT is operated again so that the CT is always controlled while the challenge bonus is operating. For this reason, while the challenge bonus is in operation, it is only necessary to control the CT, so the control associated with the transition to the challenge bonus can be simplified, and whether the CT is in operation for each game. Therefore, the control program for each game in the challenge bonus can be made common regardless of whether the CT is in operation or not, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Also, while the challenge bonus is in operation, the medals can be increased the fastest during the challenge bonus by always being controlled by the CT, so that the player's interest associated with the transition to the challenge bonus is enhanced. Can do. In particular, when the end condition is satisfied when the total number of medals paid out in the challenge bonus exceeds a specified value without the challenge bonus being terminated by the number of times of transition to CT as in this embodiment, Since the number of net increase can be increased, it is possible to further increase the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the challenge bonus.

  Also, in this embodiment, before determining whether the CT is not activated, it is determined whether a challenge bonus end condition is satisfied, and the challenge bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the CT is inactive. If the CT is not in operation, the CT is activated, so that the CT is activated again even if the challenge bonus ends. Determination, that is, unnecessary determination is not performed.

  In this embodiment, after the CT operation is started, the game is terminated when the number of games controlled by CT reaches a specified number of games (1 in this embodiment). The game ends only when a winning occurs, or ends when the number of games controlled by CT reaches the specified number of games (1 in the present embodiment) or the specified number of winnings occurs, as in the case of the regular bonus. Alternatively, the CT may be terminated under only one of the conditions. Also, it may be terminated when the total number of medals paid out during CT or the net increase (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a prescribed number, The process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  In this embodiment, the challenge bonus is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the challenge bonus exceeds the specified value after the challenge bonus has been activated. For example, it ends when the net increase in the number of medals in the challenge bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a specified value. Challenge bonus termination conditions are established by the number of games controlled by the challenge bonus, the number of games controlled by the challenge bonus reaching the specified number of games, the number of times of transition to CT reaches the specified number of times, and the CT ends. Or if any of these conditions is met, the challenge bonus end condition may be met. There.

  In this embodiment, during the challenge bonus, it is determined whether or not the CT is in operation for each game. At the same time as the transition to the challenge bonus, the CT is operated, When the challenge bonus is activated, the CT may be controlled at all times by activating CT again at the end. Even in this case, while the challenge bonus is activated, Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control associated with the transition to the challenge bonus, and in particular when the CT is controlled over a plurality of games, whether or not the CT is operating for each game. There is no need to make a determination, and it is only necessary to perform a process for re-activating the CT only when the CT is completed. Rukoto is not.

  Also, in this case, at the end of CT, before the CT is activated again, it is determined whether or not the challenge bonus end condition is satisfied, and the challenge bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination. In addition, it is preferable to operate the CT again, and in this way, the CT is not reactivated even though the challenge bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the challenge bonus, the first CT may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific prize, and the subsequent CT may be reactivated at the end of the CT.

  Further, in this embodiment, when operating the CT, it waits in a state in which the CT signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the CT signal indicating that CT is in progress, and when the output waiting time has passed, The output of the medium signal is started, and even when the CT is continuously operated during the challenge bonus, the output of the signal during the CT is stopped, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the CT is performed again. The output of the medium signal is resumed. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the CT has been interrupted by an external device that has received a CT signal. For example, it is possible to test whether the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. It can be implemented properly with external equipment.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of stop controls in which stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating in the table, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. In the case where any of the reels is already stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is provided. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, the internal winning state, the reel When all of the stop conditions (and the stop operation position (stop operation timing) of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, as in the prior art, one stop control table is selected from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). Further, there is no need to make a selection, and the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  In addition, when any of the reels is already stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected. Therefore, even when the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, and the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different. Since the stop control table may be applied, the display result of the reel can be made more diverse.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, for each spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop operation position of the stopped reel, that is, any one reel A stop control table uniquely determined for a combination of stop operation positions of stopped reels in a stopped state, and a combination of stop operation positions of two stopped reels in a state where any two reels are stopped is selected. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the selected stop control table. When the reels of the reels are stopped, select the stop control table uniquely determined for the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reels. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), no new stop control table is selected and all the reels rotate. The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops in this state.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table that is uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last is selected, and the stop control of the reel is performed according to the selected stop control table. good.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the reels is already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop state of the reel, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the set stop control table, but when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the reel stop state, and The reel stop control may be performed according to a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the stopped reel.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), no new stop control table is selected and all The stop control of the remaining reels may be performed according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the reels are rotating.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is uniquely set for the spinning reel. A predetermined stop control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels stop, Stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, the stop operation position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop positions of the remaining reels of the stopped reels And stop control of the reels may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected for the spinning reel. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected for the spinning reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop operation position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the case of reel stop control according to the table, for example, in a normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3), when any role is not won (lost), The same display result is derived when a stop operation is performed within the range of the region number where the same stop position is determined on the reel, but a specific region number among the region numbers where the same stop position is determined Only when a stop operation is performed in this area, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance as a stop control table of another reel When a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers with the same stop position selected, a display result that constitutes a chance eye is derived as a stop control table for another reel It is preferable to select a stop control table that can be used. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived As a result, there are cases where the reel display result becomes monotonous when the player has not won any combination in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), or RT (3). Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, in this case, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), the same stop position is determined among the area numbers determined. In the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), a chance to serve as a stop control table for other reels for more area numbers than when no combination is won. It is preferable to select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result to be configured. In this way, any bonus in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) In the case of winning, the chance chance is derived at a higher rate than in the case where none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3). And chance eyes By being issued, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus of winning.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, each time the reel stops, the reel to be stopped is either the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the corresponding It is preferable that a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the stop position of the reel to be transmitted is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In this way, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can detect when the reel is stopped. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects depending on not only the stop position of the reel but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, an area in which the same stop position is defined in a specific reel when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3) (losing) When the stop operation is performed within the range of numbers, the same display result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined Select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels, and select an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined When a stop operation is performed in step (2), a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance is selected as a stop control table for other reels, and a normal play is also performed. When one of the bonuses is won in the state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), the normal game state, RT (1 ), RT (2), and RT (3) to derive a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels with respect to a larger number of areas than when no combination is won. When a stop control table that can be used is selected, when the reel stop command is received, if the stop operation position satisfies the derivation condition of the chance eye, that is, the stop control table that can derive the display result constituting the chance eye Is a stop operation position that is selected, at a higher rate than in the case of other stop operation positions that do not satisfy the chance derivation condition but become the same stop position. A special effect (for example, an unusual stop sound, etc.) that informs the possibility of winning the special role may be performed. In this way, a special effect is performed when a specific reel is stopped. As a result, there is a higher possibility that chances will be finally derived than when special effects are not performed when a specific reel is stopped. Can effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change). Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  In this embodiment, when any of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus is won, or when one of the cards (1) to (3) is won. In this case, if these winning roles cannot be drawn to the active line, that is, if any of these winning roles are missed, the chances that will not stop will be stopped if none of the winning roles are won. Therefore, by deriving the display results constituting these chance eyes, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role has been won.

  In addition, when any of the winning combinations are not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus is obtained by internal lottery. Except for the case where is won, it becomes possible to derive the chance chance by winning one of the sheets (1) to (3). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and if any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop operation position (or stop position) of the stopped reel Even if a stop control table that is uniquely determined is selected and reel stop control is performed in accordance with the selected stop control table, the chances of the chances being met at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. It can be derived.

  In this embodiment, when the display result is derived for the left reel, the chance is not established, but when the display result is derived for any two reels or all reels (all winning combinations are The chance eye is established at the time when the display result is derived to any one reel, but the chance eye may be applied.

  In addition, one (1) to (3) that can be used to derive a chance when a prize cannot be won sets a maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. This is a prize that involves paying out 3 or less (1) medals, which is the number of medals required for the event, so one of the prizes (1) to (3) is won by internal lottery and cannot be won. However, not only does the player suffer a great disadvantage, but the winning probability of one (1) to (3) does not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1. It is also possible to increase the probability that winning of the sheets (1) to (3) is permitted to increase the chances of deriving chances, thereby effectively increasing the player's expectation for the bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) to (3) is one necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. It is possible to hardly influence the payout rate of the slot machine 1.

  In this embodiment, one medal is paid out to the player in accordance with the winning of one (1) to (3). The number of medals to be paid out is not limited to one, and the number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence of a specific award that can derive a chance is preferably smaller, but can be set for at least one game If the maximum number of bets (3 in this embodiment) is less than the number of medals (three in this embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. In addition, for example, when the payout number varies depending on whether to stop at a plurality of pay lines like cherry or to stop at one pay line, the payout number when the combination of combinations stops at a plurality of pay lines However, if the number of medals is less than the number of medals required to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game (3 in this embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “red 7” that constitutes a combination of one sheet (1), “white 7” that constitutes a combination of one sheet (2), and a combination of “one sheet (3)” There is no stop operation position that can aim at "Black BAR" at the same time, and it is impossible to play a game without losing one (1) to (3), and stop at a timing that does not miss any one When an operation is performed, other roles are surely missed. In this case, chances can be derived. Therefore, even a highly skilled player who plays a game so as not to miss a small role, the percentage of chances derived is not extremely low. It is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the occurrence of special roles.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination and combination of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the number of determination values referenced according to the set value is different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the set value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set in the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the judgment value number of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each combination or combination of combinations is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. In addition, when generating the winning determination table before the actual winning determination is performed, the loop processing is required twice. However, according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing may be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the production only by transmitting a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the production can be varied. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the transmission area (winning determination area) from when the start switch 7 is operated to when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating and display results are derived to the variable display device 2. With regard to, control is made so that an image is not displayed by setting a transparent area object in the foreground. Of course, the method for preventing the image from being displayed in the transmissive area (winning determination area) is not limited to this. For example, the period from the operation of the start switch 7 until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating in the first place. In the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the RGB value of each pixel of at least the transmissive area (winning determination area) is (31, 31, 31) (that is, the transmissive area (winning determination area)). (No image is displayed on the screen). Further, the transparent area (winning determination area) object may be composed of a plurality of kinds of objects that can generate a transparent color by combining them instead of preparing only one transparent color object.

  In the embodiment, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating and the display result is derived on the variable display device 2, an effect is performed until the next game is started after the start switch 7 is operated. In such a case, the transparent area (winning determination area) is made to be in a semi-transparent state by performing white addition processing or semi-transparency processing on the RGB data of each pixel in the transmission area (winning determination area). However, the method of making the transmissive area (winning determination area) a semi-transmissive state is not limited to these.

  For example, the white addition process and the translucent process are not uniformly performed for the R value, the G value, and the B value, but a specific color is enhanced (for example, to increase the blueness, In the white addition process, the addition value to the B value may be larger than the addition value to the R value or the G value, or in the semitransparent process, the transparency of the B value when performing the semitransparent process may be reduced). In the translucent process, a translucent object similar to the transparent area (winning determination area) object of the above-described embodiment in which a predetermined translucent value is set may be set. In this case, the semi-transparent object can be processed with the highest priority in each frame period in the same manner as the transparent area (winning determination area) object.

  In any case, when the RGB value of the original image data is (Rd, Gd, Bd) by the process in the translucent state, at least one of the R value, G value, or B value is set to Rd, Gd, or What is necessary is just to change to a value larger than Bd and below 31 (each maximum value of R value, G value, and B value). Unlike the above embodiment, when the RGB value of the transmissive color is represented by (0, 0, 0), the RGB value of the original image data is (Rd, Gd, Bd) by the process in the semi-transmissive state. In addition, at least one of the R, G, or B values may be changed to a value that is smaller than Rd, Gd, or Bd and equal to or greater than 0 (the minimum value of each of the R, G, and B values).

  In addition, the image of the pixel corresponding to a predetermined mesh pattern in the transmission area (winning determination area) may be transparent (that is, the RGB value is set to the complete transmission state of (31, 31, 31)). . In this case, in the pixels corresponding to the mesh pattern among the pixels included in the transmissive area (winning determination area), the images drawn on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are completely transmitted and shown to the player. In the pixels that do not correspond to the mesh pattern in the (winning determination area), the image is displayed with the RGB values of the original effect image. As a result, a dynamic effect can be performed in a wide area including the transmission area (winning determination area) of the liquid crystal display 51, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the back of the transmission area (winning determination area). It is possible to ensure the visibility of the pattern drawn on the screen.

  When this control is performed, a mesh pattern object having a mesh pattern form within a range corresponding to the transmission area (winning determination area) is set to the foreground in the same manner as the transmission area (winning determination area) object in the above embodiment. It is good to do. In this case, the mesh pattern object can also be processed with the highest priority in each frame period in the same manner as the transparent area (winning determination area) object. Also, the control for setting the translucent state by the mesh pattern can be switched to the above-described white addition processing or translucent processing according to the effect data and the state of the displayed image.

  In the above-described embodiment, when there is a payout of medals according to the display result of the variable display device 2, an effect by displaying an image is started on the liquid crystal display 51 when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating. However, the transparent area (winning determination area) was not displayed until the medal payout was completed. Of course, an effect image may be displayed in an area including the transmission area (winning determination area) when all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stop rotating without waiting for completion of the payout of medals. Of course, the image in the transmissive area (winning determination area) needs to be in a semi-transmissive state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 performs an effect by displaying an image after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating except when displaying a still image. It is not a thing. Since the display result of the variable display device 2 is fixed at the time of the third stop, it is considered that the display result is substantially derived to the variable display device 2 here, and the stop control of the third stop reel is still performed. It is good also as what starts the effect by the display of an image during the time.

  Furthermore, in the present invention, the timing for starting / ending an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 can be arbitrarily set as long as the following conditions are satisfied. After the game is started by operating the start switch 7, until all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating, the display result is derived on the variable display device 2 (or when there is a payout of medals) Is completed) at least in the transmission area (winning determination area).

Further, in the period from when all of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop rotating (or after the payout is completed when the medals are paid out) until the start switch 7 is operated, the transmission area (winning determination) Even if an integrated image is displayed in a region other than the region) and the transmission region (winning determination region), the transmission region (winning determination region) is set to a semi-transparent state. However, it is not necessary to continue the operation of the start switch 7 at the start of the next game to make the transparent area (winning determination area) a semi-transparent state, and the betting number for the next game (for example, the next game) It may be continued until it is set or a demonstration effect or a history display effect is started.

  In the above embodiment, the operation means for the player to instruct the execution of the history display effect is shared by the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 for instructing the switching of the effect mode. Separate operation means may be provided. In addition, the presentation modes that are switched by the operation of the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 are not limited to two types of mode 1 and mode 2, and there may be three or more modes. In this case, production data such as continuous production may be prepared for each type of production mode and stored in the CGROM 142 in advance.

  Further, the difference in the effect mode is not limited to the type of character appearing in the effect and the type of background image used for the effect. Only one of the character type appearing in the production and the background type used in the production may be different depending on the production mode. For example, only the character appearing in the production and / or the background color used for the production may be different depending on the production mode. Moreover, the difference in effect mode can also produce a difference in the execution probability of an effect and the execution mode of an effect. For example, in mode 1, a continuous effect that lasts for three games is performed as in the above embodiment, but in mode 2, a continuous effect that lasts only for two games may be performed.

  Furthermore, the images displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 may be exactly the same even if the effect modes are different. The effects in the slot machine are more than simple display of images on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition to displaying images, sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, lighting of the reel LED 55 and the effect LED 52, etc. Many are done in combination. Therefore, for example, the images displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the mode 1 and the mode 2 are the same, but the BGM (Back Ground Music) of the effect may be different.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration invalid flag is set in the period during the execution of the continuous effect or the bonus effect even during a period other than during the game from the operation of the start switch 7 to the derivation of the display result to the variable display device 2. By performing the active control of setting and disabling the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57, switching of the demonstration effect, the history display effect, and the effect mode is prohibited. On the other hand, it is also possible to prohibit the switching of the production mode by not calling the module for rewriting the production mode in the program executed during the execution of the continuous production or the production during the bonus. Further, when the demonstration effect and the history display effect are written by a module different from the writing of the effect data of the continuous effect, the program is executed during the execution of the continuous effect or the bonus effect. It is also possible to prohibit the demonstration effect and the history display effect from being executed by not calling the module for writing the effect data of the demonstration effect and the history display effect.

  In the above embodiment, except for the period during the execution of the continuous effect or the bonus effect, the process from the derivation of the display result to the variable display device 2 (when the medal is paid out, the payout is completed) to the operation of the start switch 7. In the period between games, the presentation mode can be switched between the mode 1 and the mode 2 only by operating the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57. On the other hand, the procedure for switching the production mode is not realized by a single operation in this way, but first, the production mode switching screen for performing the production mode switching by the first stage operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The display mode may be switched by performing the second stage operation according to the displayed display mode switching screen.

  In this case, the CGROM 133 further stores effect data for displaying the effect mode switching screen (a kind of effect) on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, for example, assuming that three types of effect modes of modes 1 to 3 are prepared, the effect data of the continuous effect and the effect during the bonus for mode 3 are stored in the CGROM 133 with the same configuration as the mode 1 and the mode 2. Will be.

  When the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 are operated between the games from the derivation of the display result on the variable display device 2 to the operation of the start switch 7, the sub-control unit 91 It is assumed that the effect data on the effect mode switching screen is read from the CGROM 133 according to the command and written in the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. By operating any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R according to the effect mode switching screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the effect data of the effect mode switching screen written in the execution effect data area, the mode 1 to the mode Any one of the three production modes can be selected.

  Even when the production mode is selected in this way, the demonstration invalid flag is set during the period of execution of the continuous production or the production during bonus, and the operation of the selection switch 56 and the decision switch 57 is invalid. The effect data on the screen is not read from the CGROM 133 and written in the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Since the effect mode switching screen is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 because the effect data on the effect mode switching screen is not written in the execution effect data area, the effect mode is switched by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. I can't do that either.

  As described above, the production data of the production mode switching screen is prohibited from being read from the temporary storage memory 155 from the CGROM 133 and written into the execution production data area, so that the production of the continuous production and the additional production or the production of the bonus production is executed. In the middle, there is no possibility that the effect data on the continuous effect being executed or the effect data in the bonus is overwritten by the effect data on the effect mode switching screen and deleted from the execution effect data area. Since it is not erased, there is no need to read out the effect data of the continuous effect and the effect during the bonus from the CGROM 133 and write it in the execution effect data area.

  For this reason, in order to display an effect mode switching screen that is not directly related to the current progress of the game, the effect data of the continuous effect and the effect during the bonus with a large amount of data are read from the CGROM 133 and stored in the temporary storage memory 155. The overhead of the process of writing in the execution effect data area is not duplicated. Further, since the effect mode cannot be switched unless the effect mode switching screen is displayed, effect data corresponding to the same situation is read from the CGROM 133 only by changing the effect mode, and not written in the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. It is possible to prevent the overhead of not becoming necessary.

  It should be noted that the modification described here can also be applied to the case where the types of effects that can be executed are set by the same two-step operation as described above, even if there is no division of the effect mode. For example, this modification is also possible when an effect type setting screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by the first operation and an effect type that can be executed according to the effect type setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is set. It is possible to apply the method shown in the example. Moreover, in the modification demonstrated here, even if it is a case where there is no difference in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the difference in effect mode, there exists an effect of this invention.

  In the embodiment, in response to the production data write command from the sub control unit 91, the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 reads the production data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and transfers it to the execution production data area of the temporary storage memory 155. I was supposed to. When the image data of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156, the effect data transferred to the execution effect data area is read. However, the development of the image data in the frame buffer memory 156 has been made by an effect start command different from the command for transferring the effect data from the CGROM 142 to the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155.

  On the other hand, if there are no effects that are executed continuously over a period of multiple games, such as continuous effects and effects during bonus, as the effects that are executed according to the progress of the game, each effect is started. In this case, the effect data can be transferred from the CGROM 142 to the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, and the expansion of the image data to the frame buffer memory 156 can be started as it is, and the CPU 91a sends a command to the VDP 141 only once. Just output. In particular, if the display frequency is high, such as an image according to the effect mode, it is convenient to make it resident in the temporary storage memory 155.

  Here, when the sub control unit 91 and the display control circuit 92 are activated by power-on (or when it is restarted by reset), the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 executes the above-described execution in the temporary storage memory 155. In addition to the various areas including the effect data area, a command for securing an area where the element data of the image corresponding to the effect mode is made resident is output, and based on this, the resident data area is temporarily stored in the temporary storage memory 155. It is enough to make it secure. Also, based on this command or another command that is output subsequently, the element data of the image corresponding to the rendering mode is transferred from the CGROM 142 to the resident data area of the temporary storage memory 155 at the time of startup (or at the time of restart). It is also good. When the effect mode is switched, the element data of the image corresponding to the effect mode after the switching is read from the CGROM 142 and overwritten on the resident data area of the temporary storage memory 155 and transferred.

  In such a case, for example, when an image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by operating the start switch 7, the CPU 91a displays an image display command together with the address of the resident data area of the temporary storage memory 155. Is output to the VDP 141, and the VDP 141 reads the element data from the resident data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on this display command, and causes the image data to be developed in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154 or the like. .

  On the other hand, when starting an effect by displaying an image other than the display of the image according to the effect mode, the CPU 91a outputs an effect start command to the VDP 141 together with the address of the CGROM 142 storing the effect data of the effect to be started. The VDP 141 reads out the effect data from the address of the CGROM 142 based on the start command and transfers the effect data to the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, and thereafter automatically generates the effect data from the execution effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. And the rendering image data can be developed in the frame buffer memory 156 by the drawing circuit 154 or the like.

  In this case, regarding various effect data executed in accordance with the progress of the game, if the address stored in the CGROM 142 is specified, the address of the execution effect data area in the temporary storage memory 155 is not specified. Image data corresponding to the effect can be generated and expanded in the frame buffer memory 156. Thereby, address management in each storage device becomes easy, and the burden of program design can be reduced. On the other hand, the element data of the image corresponding to the performance mode having a high execution frequency can be easily re-stored by storing the data already resident in the temporary storage memory 155 by designating the address in the resident data area of the temporary storage memory 155. It can be used, and since it is not necessary to read from the CGROM 142 every time, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. Although a stop control table is created for each spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel) Another stop control table is registered in the ROM 41b in advance, and based on the table index, the necessary stop control table can be specified in accordance with the internal winning state for each gaming state and the reel stop state. When the rotation starts and when the reels stop and there is still a spinning reel Referring to index, by rotating reel may be set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 regions (frames) divided every 8 steps (each symbol) are defined for one reel, and the stop control table corresponds to each region (region number). The reel is stopped by using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, a stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to an area in which one symbol varies. Although the control is performed, for example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely determined for each area less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The stop control of the reel may be performed using the stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop operation position can be changed. It can be further diversified the stop position.

  In the above embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of frames to be drawn with respect to the stop operation position, the internal winning state of each gaming state, the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or The stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected, and the stop control of the reel is performed according to the selected stop control table. When a stop operation is detected using a plurality of stop position specification tables defined in the above, a stop uniquely identified corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop position specification table when a stop operation is detected You may make it perform control which stops a reel in a position.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel by using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  In the above-described embodiment, the control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). The reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, but at least the control pattern determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. Anything that does.

  In the above embodiment, RT (1) (2) in which an increase in medals cannot be expected is applied. However, an increase in medals can be expected during RT (1) (2).

  In the above embodiment, RT (3) that can expect an increase in medals is applied. However, an increase in medals may not be expected directly, and an increase in medals cannot be expected directly. Value (for example, a lottery opportunity such as a gaming state in which an increase in medals can be expected (notified gaming state (so-called AT) in which the type of a winning combination is notified) or a high probability state of the lottery opportunity) is given. It may be possible to expect an increase in medals indirectly.

  In the above embodiment, the replay (2) that shifts to RT (3) can win even in the normal gaming state, but the replay (2) that shifts to RT (3) can be won in RT (1) (2). The replay (2) may be awarded only at RT (1) (2), and in this way, RT is controlled on the condition that it is controlled by RT (1) (2). Since it becomes possible to shift to (3), the player's expectation for shifting to RT (3) can be effectively enhanced by being controlled to RT (1) (2).

  In the above embodiment, after RT (1) (2) starts, when big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) wins, when replay (2) wins and moves to RT (2), Or, when Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), and Replay (2) reach the specified number of games without winning, RT (1) (2) is terminated. RT (1) (2) may be terminated when a falling combination is won, or RT (1) (2) is not provided with a specified number of games. After the start, RT (1) (2) may be ended when the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins or when the falling combination wins.

  In the above embodiment, the transition to RT (1) (2) is made after the end of the big bonus, but other triggers, for example, RT (1) (2) different from the transition role of RT (3). The transition to RT (1) (2) may be triggered by the combination of the transitional combinations (not limited to replay).

  In the above-described embodiment, there is an operation procedure for missing the replay (2) that becomes a transition to RT (3).

  In the above embodiment, after RT (3) starts, if any big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (3) is terminated. First, when the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) wins, or when the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) reaches the specified number of games without winning, RT (3) is terminated. However, when a falling combination is prescribed and a big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) is won, when any falling combination is won, or a big bonus (1) or big bonus (2 ) And the falling combination may not be won, and RT (2) may be ended when the specified number of games is reached.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device for paying out a game ball, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a display control circuit. It is a figure which shows a winning combination table. It is a figure which shows the game state in each state number. It is a figure which shows the table according to a role. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control table applied to the left reel in each game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control table applied to the left reel in each game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control table applied to the left reel in each game state. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image of the effect during bonus in a liquid crystal display. (A) is a figure which shows an example which made neither the non-display nor the semi-transmission of the transmission area of the front side of the reel in the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display, and (b) shows the transmission on the front side of the reel The figure which shows an example which made the area | region non-display, (c) is a figure which shows an example which made the translucent area | region of the front side of a reel semi-transparent. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (main) performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU of a sub-control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect initial setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control restoration process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a presentation control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation control interruption process which CPU of a sub-control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the effect backup process which CPU of a sub control part performs in an effect control interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a presentation control interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a presentation control interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a presentation control interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a presentation control interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the moving image display process performed in the period during the display of a moving image. It is a flowchart which shows the reset / interrupt control processing which the reset / interrupt controller of CPU of a sub control part performs. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the effect displayed using the front area | region of the reel in a liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the effect displayed using the front area | region of the reel in a liquid crystal display.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main control part 51 Liquid crystal display 90 Production control board 91 Sub control part 92 Display control circuit

Claims (5)

Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving and displaying display results in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that is finished and can receive a prize according to the display result of the variable display device,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the first specified prize winning accompanied by the provision of the gaming value and the same number of gaming values as the first specified prize winning Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to allow the generation of a prize including a plurality of types of prizes including a second specific prize and a special prize accompanying a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to a player When,
A carry-over means for carrying on the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the next game when the prior-decision means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur and the special prize has not occurred; ,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas ;
A variable display corresponding to the operation of the derivation operating means by stopping the variable display of the symbol within a predetermined maximum stop delay time from the operation of the derivation operating means in accordance with the determination of the prior determination means Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the area ;
Based on the occurrence of the special prize, the player than in the normal gaming state until a predetermined end condition is established, which is established when the total amount of gaming value reaches a predetermined amount. Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state that is advantageous for the game,
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period of time a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the awarded prize in the special gaming state;
With
The pre-determining means includes
In the special gaming state, when determining to allow the generation of a first prize-winning accompanied by the provision of a gaming value less than the maximum number of grants that can be awarded at the time of occurrence of the prize-winning in the special gaming state, At the same time, it is decided to allow the generation of the second prize-winning with the maximum number of gaming values.
The derivation control means includes
In the special game, when it is simultaneously determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first prize / winning is allowed and the generation of the second prize / winning is allowed , the operation of the derivation operating means When the display result corresponding to the first prize-winning and the display result corresponding to the second prize-winning are included in a range derivable within the range of the maximum stop delay time, the second prize-winning Priority derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive the display result corresponding to the first priority over the display result corresponding to the first prize winning;
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. From a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify one display result among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the step number with respect to the step number of the stepping motor when operated. Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the determination means;
Including
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result,
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first specific prize winning is permitted, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is the predetermined variable display area. Of the number of steps that is different from the number of steps that identifies the display result constituting the first specific prize winning with respect to the number of steps located within the range, and identifies the display result constituting the first specific prize winning First specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a first specific award winning control pattern that identifies the specific display result for at least one step number of:
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the second specific award winning is permitted, the display result constituting the second specific award winning for the specific variable display area is the predetermined Of the number of steps different from the number of steps that identifies the display result constituting the second specific prize winning with respect to the number of steps located within the range, and identifies the display result constituting the second specific prize winning Second specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a second specific award winning control pattern that specifies the specific display result for at least one step number of:
When it is determined by the pre-decision means that no winning is allowed, the display of the specific variable display area other than the specific display result from any of the number of steps. A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result;
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. A display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. ,
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and Specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one step number of the number of steps in which the first specific award winning control pattern specifies the specific display result;
A slot machine characterized by that. Variable display capable of deriving and displaying the display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas that can be variably displayed by rotating a display band on which a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols are arranged by driving a stepping motor. Equipped with equipment,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving and displaying display results in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that is finished and can receive a prize according to the display result of the variable display device,
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the first specified prize winning accompanied by the provision of the gaming value and the same number of gaming values as the first specified prize winning Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to allow the generation of a prize including a plurality of types of prizes including a second specific prize and a special prize accompanying a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to a player When,
A carry-over means for carrying on the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the next game when the prior-decision means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur and the special prize has not occurred; ,
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas ;
Control for deriving the display result of the variable display device by stopping the variable display of the symbol within the range of the maximum stop delay time determined in advance from the operation of the derivation operation means in accordance with the determination of the prior determination means. Derivation control means to perform,
Based on the occurrence of the special prize, the player than in the normal gaming state until a predetermined end condition is established, which is established when the total amount of gaming value reaches a predetermined amount. Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state that is advantageous for the game,
Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period of time a special game that determines with a higher probability than the game in the normal gaming state that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the awarded prize in the special gaming state;
With
The pre-determining means includes
In the special gaming state, when determining to allow the generation of a first prize-winning accompanied by the provision of a gaming value less than the maximum number of grants that can be awarded at the time of occurrence of the prize-winning in the special gaming state, At the same time, it is decided to allow the generation of the second prize-winning with the maximum number of gaming values.
The derivation control means includes
In the special game, when it is simultaneously determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first prize / winning is allowed and the generation of the second prize / winning is allowed , the operation of the derivation operating means When the display result corresponding to the first prize-winning and the display result corresponding to the second prize-winning are included in a range derivable within the range of the maximum stop delay time, the second prize-winning Priority derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive the display result corresponding to the first priority over the display result corresponding to the first prize winning;
In a situation where a display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and a display result has not yet been derived in another variable display area, a display result has not yet been derived. For the variable display area, one display among a plurality of display results located within a predetermined range from the number of steps relative to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated A control pattern for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to a combination of the determination result of the pre-determining means and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the result A selection means;
Including
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area,
The control pattern selection means includes
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, at least one step number of the step numbers for a specific variable display region among the plurality of variable display regions Special winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a special winning control pattern for specifying a specific display result,
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the first specific prize winning is permitted, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is the predetermined variable display area. Of the number of steps that is different from the number of steps that identifies the display result constituting the first specific prize winning with respect to the number of steps located within the range, and identifies the display result constituting the first specific prize winning First specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a first specific award winning control pattern that identifies the specific display result for at least one step number of:
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of the second specific award winning is permitted, the display result constituting the second specific award winning for the specific variable display area is the predetermined Of the number of steps different from the number of steps that identifies the display result constituting the second specific prize winning with respect to the number of steps located within the range, and identifies the display result constituting the second specific prize winning Second specific award winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a second specific award winning control pattern that specifies the specific display result for at least one step number of:
When it is determined by the pre-decision means that no winning is allowed, the display of the specific variable display area other than the specific display result from any of the number of steps. A non-winning control pattern selecting means for selecting a non-winning control pattern for specifying a result;
Including
In the display band constituting the specific variable display area, the display result constituting the first specific prize winning and the display result constituting the second specific prize winning are at intervals exceeding the predetermined range. Has been placed,
The first specific prize-winning control pattern includes the first specific prize-winning only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the second specific prize-winning is located within the predetermined range. The display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified for at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the second specific prize is located within the predetermined range. ,
In the second specific prize winning control pattern, the second specific prize winning control is performed only for the number of steps different from the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. A display result to be configured is specified, and the specific display result is specified with respect to at least one step number of the step numbers in which the display result forming the first specific prize winning is located within the predetermined range. ,
The special winning control pattern is the number of steps in which the display result constituting the first specific winning prize is positioned within the predetermined range, and the second specific winning prize control pattern specifies the specific display result The specific display result is specified for at least one of the number of steps to be performed, and the display result constituting the second specific award winning is the number of steps positioned within the predetermined range, and Specifying the specific display result with respect to at least one step number of the number of steps in which the first specific award winning control pattern specifies the specific display result;
A slot machine characterized by that. A winning determination means for determining whether a winning has occurred or not according to the display result of the variable display device;
The winning determination means determines whether or not the second award has occurred according to the display result of the variable display device only in the special gaming state.
The slot machine according to claim 1 or 2 , characterized by the above-mentioned. The control pattern selection unit is configured to perform the step when the prior determination unit simultaneously determines that the first prize winning is permitted and the second prize winning is permitted. The display result constituting the second award winning is specified with respect to the number of steps capable of drawing both the display result constituting the first award winning and the display result constituting the second award winning among the numbers. A second award winning priority control pattern selection means for selecting a second award winning priority control pattern to be performed,
The slot machine according to claim 1 or 3 , wherein The control pattern selection unit is configured to perform the step when the prior determination unit simultaneously determines that the first prize winning is permitted and the second prize winning is permitted. The display result constituting the second award winning is specified with respect to the number of steps capable of drawing both the display result constituting the first award winning and the display result constituting the second award winning among the numbers. A second award winning priority control pattern selection means for selecting a second award winning priority control pattern to be performed,
The slot machine according to claim 2 or 3 , wherein

Images